You are on page 1of 268

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine


Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this book.

Konica 7045
Workgroup Document System™

User's Manual

ENERGY STAR® Program


The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the
widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that reduce
energy consumption and prevent pollution. As an ENERGY STAR Partner,
Konica Corporation, Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY
STAR guidelines for energy efficiency grounding it on the following features.
Auto Low Power
This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit. In the standard setting, Auto
Low Power operates automatically when 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the
copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.
The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes,
60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, or 240 minutes. See p. 5-2 for details.
Automatic Shut-Off
This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning OFF the power supply, thereby reducing
energy consumption to 15W or less. In the standard setting, Automatic Shut-Off follows Auto Low Power,
operating automatically when 60 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy, with the copier
remaining in the ready to copy state during that time.
The time period for the Automatic Shut-Off function can be set for 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120
minutes or 240 minutes. See p. 5-3 for details.
Automatic Duplex Copying
To reduce paper consumption, use this function to make double-sided (duplex) copies, automatically.

We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function, the Automatic Shut-Off function, and the Automatic
Duplex Copying function.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


© 2000 by Konica Business Technologies, Inc.

MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
The KONICA 7045 Workgroup Document System™ will give you many years of trouble-free service. To ensure
high quality copying performance and to prevent premature wear and failure of precision parts and components,
periodic cleaning and routine adjustments should be scheduled.

We recommend that you contact your service center to discuss the benefits and advantages of Konica's
Customer Service Maintenance Agreement and to be shown how a maintenance plan can be tailored to your
individual copying needs.

NOTICE:
Konica Business Technologies, Inc. has made every effort to ensure that the information in this manual is
complete and accurate. However, constant efforts are also being made to improve and update the product.
Therefore, Konica Business Technologies, Inc. shall not be liable for errors in this manual or for any
consequential damages resulting from the use of this manual. The information contained herein is subject to
changes without notice.

FEDERAL OR STATE STATUTES MAY PROHIBIT THE COPYING OF CERTAIN DOCUMENTS OR


INFORMATION, RESULTING IN FINES OR IMPRISONMENT FOR VIOLATORS.

MANUAL PART NUMBER:


OP-7045-01

Web Site Address


To obtain additional product information, visit our Web site at: http://www.konicabt.com

CORRESPONDENCE:
Correspondence regarding this manual may be mailed to the address shown below.

KONICA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.


MARKETING DEPARTMENT
500 DAY HILL ROAD
WINDSOR, CT 06095

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Section 1: Introduction
To the User ........................................................................................................ 1-2
Overview of the User's Manual ............................................................................... 1-2
Digital Technology.............................................................................................. 1-3
Help Mode ............................................................................................................... 1-4
Control Panel with Interactive Touch Screen .......................................................... 1-4
Key Operator Functions .......................................................................................... 1-4
Machine Labels ....................................................................................................... 1-4
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier ....................................................... 1-5
Standard Equipment ........................................................................................ 1-12
Configuration Options ...................................................................................... 1-12
Optional Equipment.......................................................................................... 1-12

Section 2: Safety Information


Regulations ........................................................................................................ 2-2
FCC Regulations ..................................................................................................... 2-2
Laser Safety ............................................................................................................ 2-2
Canadian Department of Communications Regulations ......................................... 2-2
FDA Regulations ..................................................................................................... 2-2
User Instructions ................................................................................................ 2-3
Machine Labels .................................................................................................. 2-4
Machine Installation and Power Requirements .................................................. 2-6
Machine Handling and Care............................................................................... 2-8
Routine Safety.................................................................................................. 2-10

Section 3: Machine Information


Machine Configuration ....................................................................................... 3-2
External Machine Call-Outs .................................................................................... 3-3
Internal Machine Call-Outs ..................................................................................... 3-4
Standard and Optional Equipment Layout .............................................................. 3-5
Site Requirements.............................................................................................. 3-6
Control Panel Layout.......................................................................................... 3-7
Touch Screen ..................................................................................................... 3-8
Basic Screen ........................................................................................................... 3-8
Initial Settings ..................................................................................................... 3-9
Auto/Reset Mode ............................................................................................... 3-9
Automatic Paper Selection (APS) ...................................................................... 3-9
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) .......................................................... 3-9
Automatic Exposure Selection (AES)................................................................. 3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Section 3: Machine Information (continued)


Automatic Tray Selection (ATS) ....................................................................... 3-10
Lead Edge Delete ............................................................................................ 3-10
Service Settings ............................................................................................... 3-11
Key Operator Password ........................................................................................ 3-11
ECM Master Key Code ......................................................................................... 3-11
Weekly Timer Master Key Code ........................................................................... 3-11
Display Messages: ADD TONER/ PM CALL ........................................................ 3-11
Staple Sheet Capacity .......................................................................................... 3-11
Original Page Count.............................................................................................. 3-11
Paper Exit Switching of Finisher Tray ................................................................... 3-12
Paper Exit Switching of Finisher Tray in Staple-Sort Mode .................................. 3-12
ADVANCE & DELETE Keys on Job List Screen .................................................. 3-12
ECM Password Entering After Setting Reserve Job ............................................. 3-12
Conrol Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen ........................................................... 3-12

Section 4: Paper Information


Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass .......................................................... 4-2
Positioning an Original for Manual Copying ............................................................ 4-2
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) ............................... 4-3
Positioning Originals ............................................................................................... 4-4
Positioning Mixed Originals ..................................................................................... 4-5
Paper in Main Body Trays .................................................................................. 4-6
Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray...................................................................... 4-6
Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit ......................................................................... 4-6
Paper in Finisher ................................................................................................ 4-7
Paper Weight Compatibility Chart ...................................................................... 4-8

Section 5: Copier Management


Power Saver Mode............................................................................................. 5-2
Auto Low Power ...................................................................................................... 5-2
Manual Shut-Off ...................................................................................................... 5-3
Auto Shut-Off .......................................................................................................... 5-3
Entering an ECM Password ............................................................................... 5-4
Weekly Timer Function ...................................................................................... 5-5
Timer Interrupt ........................................................................................................ 5-5
Counter List ........................................................................................................ 5-7
To Display the Counter List ..................................................................................... 5-7
To Print the Counter List ......................................................................................... 5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Section 6: Basic Operations


How to Make a Basic Copy ................................................................................ 6-2
The Basic Screen .................................................................................................... 6-2
Copy Mode ......................................................................................................... 6-4
Copy Mode Using RADF ......................................................................................... 6-5
1-2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass ........................................................................ 6-6
Copy Density ...................................................................................................... 6-7
Automatic Exposure Selection (AES) ..................................................................... 6-7
Manual Mode (Light, Normal, Darker) ..................................................................... 6-7
Lens Mode ......................................................................................................... 6-8
Automatic Paper Selection (APS) ........................................................................... 6-8
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) ............................................................... 6-9
Preset and User Set Ratios .................................................................................. 6-10
Zoom Mode ........................................................................................................... 6-11
Special Ratio Table ............................................................................................... 6-12
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom ....................................................................................... 6-13
Copy Size ......................................................................................................... 6-15
Selecting Copy Size .............................................................................................. 6-15
Selecting Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray ....................................................................... 6-16
Reserve ............................................................................................................ 6-17
Set Reserve Job ................................................................................................... 6-17
Mishandled Paper During Reserve Setting ........................................................... 6-19
When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress .................................................. 6-20
Job List Screen ................................................................................................ 6-21
Store Mode....................................................................................................... 6-23
Platen Store Mode ................................................................................................ 6-23
RADF Store Mode ................................................................................................. 6-25
Rotation ............................................................................................................ 6-26
Rotation and APS ................................................................................................. 6-26
Rotation and AMS ................................................................................................. 6-27
To Release Automatic Rotation ............................................................................ 6-28
Check Mode and Proof Copy ........................................................................... 6-29
Interrupt Mode .................................................................................................. 6-31
Help Mode ........................................................................................................ 6-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Section 7: Output Modes


Finisher Specifications ....................................................................................... 7-2
Non-Sort Mode ................................................................................................... 7-4
Sort Mode........................................................................................................... 7-6
Group Mode ....................................................................................................... 7-8
Staple-Sort Mode ............................................................................................. 7-10
Face Up Mode.................................................................................................. 7-13
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher ...................................................... 7-14
Normal Exit ........................................................................................................... 7-16
Rotation Exit .......................................................................................................... 7-17
Face Up Exit ......................................................................................................... 7-19

Section 8: Applications
Application Function Menu ................................................................................. 8-2
Sheet/Cover Insertion ........................................................................................ 8-3
Chapter .............................................................................................................. 8-8
Combination ..................................................................................................... 8-10
Booklet ......................................................................................................................... 8-12
Special Paper ................................................................................................... 8-14
Transparency Interleaving .................................................................................... 8-14
Thin/Thick Paper ................................................................................................... 8-16
Image Insert ..................................................................................................... 8-17
Book Copy........................................................................................................ 8-20
Special Original ................................................................................................ 8-23
Mixed Original ....................................................................................................... 8-23
Folded Original ...................................................................................................... 8-25
Non-Standard Size ................................................................................................ 8-27
Upside Down ......................................................................................................... 8-28
Text/Photo Enhance......................................................................................... 8-30
Reverse Image ................................................................................................. 8-32
Repeat.............................................................................................................. 8-33
Frame/Fold Erasure ......................................................................................... 8-37
AUTO Layout ................................................................................................... 8-39
Image Shift ....................................................................................................... 8-40
Non-Image Area Erase .................................................................................... 8-42
Stamp/Overlay ............................................................................................................. 8-44

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Section 9: Job Memory


Job Store ............................................................................................................ 9-2
Job Recall .......................................................................................................... 9-4
Job Memory Form .............................................................................................. 9-5

Section 10: Shortcuts


Reserve Job ..................................................................................................... 10-2
Platen Store Mode ........................................................................................... 10-2
RADF Store Mode ............................................................................................ 10-2
Sheet/Cover Insertion ...................................................................................... 10-3
Chapter ............................................................................................................ 10-3
Combination ..................................................................................................... 10-3
Booklet ............................................................................................................. 10-4
Special Paper ................................................................................................... 10-4
Transparency Interleaving .................................................................................... 10-4
Thin/Thick Paper ................................................................................................... 10-5
Image Insert ..................................................................................................... 10-5
Book Copy........................................................................................................ 10-6
Special Original ................................................................................................ 10-6
Mixed Original ....................................................................................................... 10-6
Folded Original ...................................................................................................... 10-7
Non-Standard Size ................................................................................................ 10-7
Upside Down ......................................................................................................... 10-7
Text/Photo Enhance......................................................................................... 10-8
Reverse Image ................................................................................................. 10-8
Repeat.............................................................................................................. 10-9
Frame/Fold Erasure ......................................................................................... 10-9
AUTO Layout ................................................................................................. 10-10
Image Shift ..................................................................................................... 10-10
Non-Image Area Erase .................................................................................. 10-10
Stamp/Overlay ............................................................................................... 10-11
Stamp .................................................................................................................. 10-11
Overlay ................................................................................................................ 10-11
Loading Paper ................................................................................................ 10-12
Loading Paper in Universal Tray ......................................................................... 10-12
Loading Paper in LCT (Large Capacity Tray) ..................................................... 10-12
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray ......................................................... 10-12
Adding Toner.................................................................................................. 10-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Section 11: Key Operator Mode


To the Key Operator......................................................................................... 11-2
How to Access the Key Operator Mode ................................................................ 11-3
Function Menu Map ......................................................................................... 11-4
System Initial [1] ............................................................................................... 11-6
Time [1] ................................................................................................................. 11-6
Language [2] ......................................................................................................... 11-7
Copier Initial [2] ................................................................................................ 11-8
Copy Mode [1] ....................................................................................................... 11-9
Density [2] ........................................................................................................... 11-10
Magnification [3] .................................................................................................. 11-11
Tray [4] ................................................................................................................ 11-12
Output [5] ............................................................................................................ 11-13
Non-Image Erase [6] ........................................................................................... 11-15
Preset Key [3]................................................................................................. 11-16
Density [1] ........................................................................................................... 11-16
Magnification [2] .................................................................................................. 11-18
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4]................................................................. 11-19
How to Access the ECM Setting Mode ............................................................... 11-20
Change ECM Data [1] ......................................................................................... 11-21
ECM Data List [2] ................................................................................................ 11-24
All Counter Reset [3] ........................................................................................... 11-26
ECM On/Off Setting [4] ....................................................................................... 11-27
Copy Limit Reached Effect [5] ............................................................................ 11-28
Lock Job Memory [5] ...................................................................................... 11-29
Paper Type [6]................................................................................................ 11-30
Panel Contrast [7] .......................................................................................... 11-31
Key Operator Data [8] .................................................................................... 11-32
Weekly Timer [9] ............................................................................................ 11-33
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode ................................................. 11-34
Weekly Timer Setting [1] ..................................................................................... 11-35
Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set [2] ....................................................... 11-36
Machine Working Day Individual Set [3] ............................................................. 11-38
Lunch Hour Off Function [4] ................................................................................ 11-40
Password Setting [5] ........................................................................................... 11-42
Touch Panel Adjustment [10] ......................................................................... 11-43
Power Save [11] ............................................................................................. 11-44
Memory Switch [12]........................................................................................ 11-46
List Print [13] .................................................................................................. 11-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Contents

Section 11: Key Operator Mode (continued)


Application Customize [14]............................................................................. 11-52
Density Shift [15] ............................................................................................ 11-54
KRDS Host [16] .............................................................................................. 11-55
Key Operator ECM Form ............................................................................... 11-56

Section 12: Maintenance & Supplies


Loading Paper .................................................................................................. 12-2
Add Paper Indicator .............................................................................................. 12-2
Using the HELP Key ............................................................................................. 12-2
Loading Paper in Universal Tray ........................................................................... 12-3
Programming Copy Size of Universal Tray ........................................................... 12-4
To Display Universal Tray Size Selection Screen ................................................. 12-4
Loading Paper in LCT (Large Capacity Tray) ....................................................... 12-5
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray ........................................................... 12-6
Adding Toner.................................................................................................... 12-7
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge ..................................................................... 12-8
Preventive Maintenance................................................................................... 12-9
Cleaning the Left Partition Glass.................................................................... 12-10
Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover ...................................................... 12-10
Service, Repairs, Supplies ............................................................................. 12-11

Section 13: Troubleshooting


Call for Service ................................................................................................. 13-2
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble .................................................................... 13-3
Memory Overflow ............................................................................................. 13-4
Copy Conditions Using Memory ........................................................................... 13-5
Action 1 ................................................................................................................. 13-6
Action 2 ................................................................................................................. 13-7
Power OFF/ON Screen .................................................................................... 13-8
Clearing Mishandled Paper .............................................................................. 13-9
Troubleshooting Tips...................................................................................... 13-11

Section 14: Machine Specifications


Specifications ................................................................................................... 14-2

Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 1: Introduction

To the User
Overview of the User’s Manual

Digital Technology
Help Mode
Control Panel with Interactive Touch Screen
Key Operator Functions
Machine Labels

Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier


Standard Equipment
Configuration Options
Optional Equipment

Introduction 1-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
To the User

Welcome to the Konica 7045 Workgroup Document SystemTM. This section includes an
overview of the User's Manual and a description of the product. Before attempting to operate
your equipment, read this section to familiarize yourself with the product and also read
Safety Information in section 2 to learn how to operate this equipment in a safe manner.

Overview of the User's Manual


To enjoy optimal performance, operate your equipment as instructed in this User's
Manual. As a convenience to all users, keep the manual located with the equipment.

Manual Organization
This manual includes twelve topic sections, Specifications of the product, a Glossary of
copier terms, and an Index. Highlights are as follows:
Section 1: General product information and features.
Section 2: Safety information to be read and understood before operating this equipment.
Section 3: Machine information to be used as a reference when performing all jobs,
especially when capacities, sizes and weights are factors.
Section 4: Paper information to be used as reference when performing all jobs.
Section 5: Copier management information to be read before operating this equipment.
Section 6: Information on using the touch screen and selecting basic functions.
Section 7: Information on machine output modes with and without the finisher.
Section 8: Information on special application modes.
Section 9: Information on Job Memory functions.
Section 10: Provides Shortcuts for special application functions and some basic
functions.
Section 11: Information on Key Operator functions to be used only by an authorized
person.
Section 12: Information on machine maintenance and replenishing paper and toner.
Section 13: Troubleshooting information for clearing mishandled paper.
Section 14: Provides machine specifications for the main body and accessories.

Page Design
The page layout of this manual is designed to help you perform each operation quickly
and easily. The basic format includes an introductory explanation of each function; step-
by-step procedures; and illustrations to enhance many of the procedures. Caution
statements specific to a topic are located on appropriate pages. Special notes are
located at the bottom of the page.
1-2 Introduction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Digital Technology

The Konica 7045 Workgroup Document System™ is a digital printer/copier that can be
used either as a standalone copier or as a high-speed network printer when connected
to the optional IP-431 Image Processor.

The Konica 7045 Printer/Copier can also be used as a print server on a network
operating system when installed with the optional KN-303 Network Interface Board.

Separate user’s manuals and installation instructions are included with the optional IP-
431 and KN-303 devices.

Digital technology and memory capability of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier provide
many advantages over the conventional photocopying process.

In conventional photocopying, a scanned image virtually remains intact as it is represented


on the drum and copied onto the output media. While many settings can be made before
outputting the copies, such as with image reduction, enlargement, and erasure or job store
and job recall, the conventional photocopying process is not capable of transforming
image into bits and storing image data into memory as with digital technology.

In the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier, scanned image is electronically digitized into data bits
that are represented in code form and stored into memory. Stored data can be retrieved
from memory and output in various ways, as controlled by software. Digitized image is
represented as pixels on a screen and as dots per inch (dpi) on hard copy. The Konica
7045 Printer/Copier resolves image at 600 dpi.

Konica 7045 Printer/Copier digital technology enables you to:


• feed originals only once to make multiple copies, thereby preserving the condition of
originals
• store image in memory and perform Sheet/Cover insertion, Chapter, Combination,
Booklet, Image insert, Book copy, Mixed original, Repeat, Image shift
• enhance photo, complex text image quality, and enhance lighter image
• reduce toner consumption and produce clean copies with Non-image area erase
• organize images into booklet format
• insert images scanned from the platen into a set scanned from the document feeder
• overlay stamp images on scanned original
• check copying conditions and produce a proof copy before making multiple copied sets
• confirm the current machine status
• select offset-sort, offset-group, or staple-sort output mode using optional Finisher (FS-
109)
• set reverse jobs to make copies of different types in succession
Introduction 1-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Digital Technology (continued)

Help Mode
Help can be obtained for any function or mode that is displayed on the screen.

Control Panel with Interactive Touch Screen


The Konica 7045 Printer/Copier control panel is user friendly and easy to operate. The
POWER SAVER ON/OFF key, TIMER and DATA indicators and keys for selecting
STOP/CLEAR, INTERRUPT, PROOF COPY and START are located at the far right side
of the panel. Immediately to the left is the keypad, along with keys for selecting print
quantity, P (Programming) and CLEAR QTY. To the left again are keys to select
CHECK, HELP, APPLICATION, OUTPUT, JOB MEMORY, and AUTO RESET. To the
left of these keys is the interactive touch screen. At the top of the panel are the keys for
selecting SCANNER, PRINTER, and COPY modes.

Key Operator Functions


Custom settings can be made by the key operator or anyone who is responsible for the
machine. Access to the Key Operator mode may require a key operator password, if
previously set by service. Use the password system to limit use of key operator functions
to a person who is authorized to handle the responsibility.

Machine Labels
Information labels are affixed to the copier to provide quick and easy instructions on
basic copying, loading paper, adding toner, and clearing mishandled paper. In addition,
safety labels are attached to various internal areas of the copier, and provide cautionary
information that must be heeded to prevent personal injury or damage to the copier.
Sample machine safety labels are shown in Section 2: Safety Information.

1-4 Introduction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier

• AES - Automatic Exposure Selection


When AES is on, the machine automatically adjusts the exposure to compensate for the
original.

• AMS - Automatic Magnification Selection


When you select Copy Size manually without specifying the magnification, AMS
automatically selects an appropriate ratio for you.

• APS - Automatic Paper Selection


When APS is on, copy paper size is selected automatically to match your original.

• ATS - Automatic Tray Selection


When paper is depleted in the tray in use. ATS switches to another tray with the same
paper size. This feature enables you to continue copying without interruption.

• Auto Layout
This Application mode feature operates by default with Non-image area erase. Use Auto
Layout with the RADF cover raised and position the original anywhere on the platen
glass. The output image will be centered automatically. When using Auto Layout, be
sure the overhead lighting in your work place is not directly over the platen glass, as this
will cause Non-image area erase to function incorrectly.
NOTE: Unless the oblique setting for Non-image area erase mode has been set in the key operator mode,
the original must be positioned in a normal rectangular mode. i. e., not skewed at an angle.

• Auto Low Power


After a specified period of inactivity the lower power mode is automatically enabled.

• Auto Reset
This mode automatically resets the machine to the default mode settings. Use this
mode before making job selections to clear settings previously made.

• Auto Shut-Off
After a specified period of inactivity, power to the copier is automatically shut down.

• Book Copy
This Application mode feature is used to copy each side of an opened book onto
separate letter size sheets. The Book Copy mode can also be used to copy a large
sheet previously copied from a book or two letter size sheets placed side by side and
obtain the same result. Line up the spine of the book or the center of the page with the
arrow located at the bottom of the platen glass.

Introduction 1-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier (continued)

• Booklet Mode
This Application mode feature allows you to scan letter size originals into memory and
copy them into a booklet format on letter size folding to 5.5"x8.5" or ledger size folding to
8.5"x11". Original scan be single sided or two sided.

• Chapter
This Application mode feature allows you to start each new chapter or section on the
right hand page when making two-sided copies by entering the actual page number of
each chapter title page.

• Check Key
The Check mode allows you to view all job selections before actually printing a job. To
display the Check Screen, touch the Check Key before pressing Start.

• Clear Qty
This feature allows you to change only the print quantity without changing the other
settings.

• Combination Mode
This Application mode feature includes 2 in 1, 4 in 1 and 8 in 1 modes. The Combination
feature allows you to scan 2, 4, or 8 originals into memory then copy them onto on page
for quick reference. This efficient use of paper that provides information at a glance also
reduces the amount of paper to be filed in a drawer or carried in a brief case.

• Copy Density
Choose from nine density selections to select density manually.

• Copy Mode
For copy modes are available. In the simplex modes, copies are output with image on
one side only. In the duplex mode, copies are output with image on both sides of the
sheet. Select a simpex mode of 1-sided to 1-sided or 2-sided to 1-sided; or select a
duplex mode of 1-sided to 2-sided or 2-sided to 2-sided.

• Density Shift
Density Shift can be used to adjust the density levels for four modes, Text/photo, Text,
Photo, Increase Contrast. Density Shift divides each level into two levels of lighter and
three levels of darker density.

1-6 Introduction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier (continued)

• Frame/Fold Erasure
Frame/Fold Erasure is an Application mode feature used to erase selected portions of
originals such as black marks along the borders (frame) or down the middle (fold).
Frame Erasure and Fold Erasure can be used together.

• Group Mode
Use the Group mode to make multiple copies of each page in the original set. For
example, if you select 5 for the print quantity, you will output 5 copies of page 1, then 5
copies of page 2, 5 copies of page 3, etc., until all original pages are copied.

• Help Mode
Help can be selected from any screen, except Job Memory or Key Operator Screens, for
help on the topic at hand. Or, you may touch the Help icon [?] in the upper right screen
to display the Help menu on specific topics, e.g., supplies, service, etc.

• Image Insert
Scan special images from the platen glass, then insert them at designated page
locations of a document scanned from the RADF. Memory is used for this feature.

• Image Rotation
Use this mode to rotate the original image so that it conforms to the paper loaded in the
tray. For example, when paper in the tray is 8.5"x11"R, you can place an original
vertically and its image will be rotated and placed in on the copy paper in landscape
orientation.
This feature can be activated, deactivated, activated with APS/AMS, or activated with
APS only by the key operator.
Service can set the copier to allow you to activate or deactivate this feature.

• Image Shift
This Application mode feature allows you to create a binding margin (right binding or left
binding) for hole punching by shifting the image away from the punched area.

• Intelligent Scanning
The left partition glass allows real-time scanning from the RADF as compared to
conventional scanning. Scanning begins the moment the original starts to feed.

• Interrupt Copying
Interrupt a job in progress to perform another job. When that job is completed, the
original job will automatically resume operation from the place where it was interrupted.

Introduction 1-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier (continued)

• Job List
Display the current machine status on the LCD.

• Job Memory
Store up to 15 frequently performed jobs and eliminate the need to repeat the same job
features time and again.

• Lens Mode
Select Preset and Userset ratios, three reduction, three enlargement and three userset;
select a Zoom ratio from 25% ~ 400%; or select a Vertical/Horizontal Zoom ratio from
vertical zoom 25% ~ 400% and horizontal zoom 25% ~ 400%.

• Magnification
The key operator can set three user-programmable ratios, from 25% ~ 400%.

• Manual Shut-Off
Press the power saver ON/OFF switch to shut off the main power.

• Mixed Original Mode


This Application mode feature enables you to copy multi-size originals in one of two
modes. In APS mode, output paper will match the multi-size papers in the original
document. In AMS mode, output will be made on a selected uniform paper size and the
appropriate magnification ratio will be selected automatically.

• Non Image Area Erase


This Application mode feature enables you to leave the platen cover open during
copying without causing black borders to appear on the output copies. This is useful
when you need to copy originals that are unsuitable for the RADF. When using this
mode, be sure the overhead lighting in your workplace is not directly over the platen
glass, as this will cause Non-image area erase to function incorrectly.

• Output (When Finisher is installed)


Non-sort, Sort, Staple-Sort, Group and Face Up modes are available. Output the Non-
Sort copies in the same order as the originals, without offsetting. Output the Sort copies
offsetting each set. Output the Staple-Sort copies with each set stapled. Output the
Group copies by offsetting each group. Output the Face Up copies facing up in reverse
order of the originals, without offsetting.
Finisher is equipped with three exit trays. Tray 1 (Finisher upper exit tray) enables you
to select Group and/or Face Up mode(s). Tray 2 or 3 (Finisher middle/lower exit tray)
enables you to select Sort, Group, or Staple-sort.
1-8 Introduction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier (continued)

• Output (When No Finisher is installed)


Normal, Alternate and Face Up exit modes are available.
Use the Sort with normal exit as the default condition to output copies in the same order
as the originals. Use the Group with normal exit to output multiple copies of each
original.
Use the Sort with alternate exit to alternately switch the horizontal-vertical orientation of
each copied set. Use Group with alternate exit to alternately switch the horizontal-
vertical orientation of multiple copies of each original. Use the Face Up exit together with
Sort, Group, and/or Alternate exit to output copies facing up.

• Overlay
This Application mode feature allows you to scan an original image and overlay it on the
pages of another document. For example, you may want to incorporate a page heading,
graphic design or logo into the pages of your document.

• Paper Capacity
Total 2,100 sheets in the machine with DB-208 drawer, including four 500-sheet trays
and a 100-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray.
Total 1,100 sheets in the machine with DB-208A drawer, including two 500-sheet trays
and a 100-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray.
Total 2,600 sheets in the machine with DB-608 drawer, including two 500-sheet trays, a
1,500-sheet tray and a 100-sheet Multi-sheet bypass tray.

• Power Saver
The Power Saver mode enables you to conserve energy when the machine is not in use.
For example, the 7045 will power down after a specified amount of time has elapsed,
adjustable for up to 4 hours.

• Proof Copy
Proof Copy allows you to print one finished set for the purpose of reviewing the result of
the job settings you selected. This is particularly useful when running a large job. If the
proof copy indicates the need for change, you can make the change, then press [START]
to complete the job.

• Recall
Touch the Recall key while your job is running to display the print quantity amount
selected for the job. This is convenient when you cannot recall the amount you selected.

Introduction 1-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier (continued)

• Repeat Image
This is a feature of the Application mode that enables you to repeat a small image many
times on one page. This is handy for making copies of your business card or a
notification form.

• Reverse Image
This is a feature of the Application mode that reverses the original image from black
image on white background to white image on black background, and vice versa.

• Rotation Exit
When no Finisher is installed, you can separate each output set by alternately switching
the horizontal and vertical orientation of each sorted set as it outputs to the exit tray. Be
sure to load both 8.5"x11" and 8.5"x11"R paper in separate trays including the Multi-
sheet bypass tray.

• Scan
The SCAN key is used in certain applications that require a scanning step before starting
the job.

• Sheet/Cover Insert
This is a feature of the Application mode that enables you to insert covers into the
finished document or insert special sheets within the finished document at locations
specified as you set up the job.

• Sort Mode
Use Sort mode to make multiple copies of the original set. For example, if you select
print quantity of 5, you will make 5 sets of the originals.

• Special Paper
This is a feature of the Application mode to be specified when using special paper for
copying, i.e. transparency film, thick paper or thin paper. When using transparency,
select either Blank or Copy Sheet Interleaving mode for each original.

• Staple
Select the desired staple position for your document after touching the STAPLE SET key
on the Output Mode Screen. Place one staple in the upper left corner of portrait or
landscape sheets or place two staples along the left side of portrait or landscape sheets.

1-10 Introduction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Features of the Konica 7045 Printer/Copier (continued)

• Stop/Clear
Use [STOP/CLEAR] if you want to stop the job in progress and clear the settings. This will
enable you to reset the job from the Basic Screen.

• Text/Photo Enhance
This is a feature of the Application mode. Text Enhance enhances only the text of an
original, not the background. Photo Enhance enhances photo images and can be used
with High or Very High resolution to obtain optimal resolution.

• Transparency Interleave
This is a feature of the Application mode that inserts a blank or copied sheet of paper for
each transparency copied. This not only keeps the transparencies from sticking together,
making them easier to handle and read, but it also provides a copied set of the
transparencies that can be made into multiple sets and distributed as handouts during a
presentation.

• Weekly Timer
Use this feature to make efficient use of your equipment by setting the power off/on
daily, weekly or during lunch time and holidays. You can also set the timer interrupt
mode to enable temporary use of the machine when it is in the off mode.

Introduction 1-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Introduction
Standard Equipment

Main Body with 1 Paper Tray (500 sheets)


Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) (DF-315)
Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU)

Configuration Options

with Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray (100 sheets)


with DB-208 (500/500/500 sheets)
with DB-208A (500 sheets and Storage)
with DB-608 (500/1,500 sheets)

Optional Equipment

Stapler Finisher (FS-109) with three Finisher trays


The Upper tray of the Finisher only handles pages that are output without the
offset function. The Middle and Lower Finisher trays handle pages that are output
with or without the offset function.
Expanded Memory unit: MU-403 (32 MB), MU-404 (64MB), MU-405 (128MB)
Remote Diagnostics
External Image Processor (IP-431)
Hard Disk Drive (HD-103)
Network Interface Board (KN-303)
Post Script 3 (PS-342)
Key Counter

1-12 Introduction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 2: Safety Information

Regulations
FCC Regulations
Laser Safety
Canadian Department of Communications Regulations
FDA Regulations

User Instructions
Machine Labels
Machine Installation and Power Requirements
Machine Handling and Care
Routine Safety

Safety Information 2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Regulations

FCC Regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense.

Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1,
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.

Canadian Department of Communications Regulations


Le présent appareil n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites
applicables aux de Classe A prescites dans le règlement sur la brouillage radioélectrique
édicté par Le Ministère des Communications du Canada.

This equipment does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions as set out
in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

FDA Regulations
This Copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.Department of Health
and Human Service (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this printer is
completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.

2-2 Safety Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
User Instructions

The following pages include important safety information that should be read and
understood before you attempt to operate the machine. If you have any concerns about
safety matters, please contact your service representative. Keep this manual
permanently located with the machine, and in good, legible condition. The manual
should be readily available to all users.

Machine safety labels are attached to the internal area of the machine. The purpose of
the safety labels is to alert you of imminent or potentially hazardous situations or
conditions. Be sure to heed all safety labels. If safety labels become illegible due to
soilage, etc., please contact your service representative for information on obtaining
replacements.

Examples of machine safety labels are shown on the following page.

The following standard safety categories are commonly used on product labelling.

DANGER:
Danger indicates an imminent hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Note:
The DANGER category is not required for this product, and is included here for general user
information.

WARNING:
Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION:
Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate bodily injury.

NOTICE:
Notice provides information on the correct handling or use of the machine to prevent breakage of
the copier or some machine part, etc. If does not indicate concern for personal safety.

Safety Information 2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Machine Labels

Label Locations

CAUTION CAUTION
ATTENTION
PRECAUCION DO NOT INSERT
CUIDADO your finger into the
two RADF hinge
portions, otherwise
CAUTION you may be injured.
ATTENTION
PRECAUCION
CUIDADO

WARNING
This area generates
high voltage. If
touched, electrical
shock may occur. DO
NOT TOUCH!

CAUTION ATTENTION PRECAUCION CUIDADO


High temperature! Température élevée! ¡Temperatura alta! Alta temperatura!
Do not touch. Risque de brûlure. No tocar. Não toque!
Use care when Soyez prudent en retirant Tener cuidado al Tenha cuidado ao
clearing paper. la feuille coincée. remover el papel. remover o papel.

CAUTION
This internal area is
very hot. To avoid
getting burned DO
NOT TOUCH.

2-4 Safety Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Machine Labels (continued)

CAUTION:
To avoid injury when the
Finisher middle exit tray
moves up and down, DO
NOT PUT your hand into
the two portions of the
closing area.

CAUTION: FS-109 Finisher

DO NOT INSERT your


finger into the two staple
driving portions or into
the grooves of the paper
exit lever, otherwise you
may be injured.

• Avoid getting burned.


Do not touch any machine area that you are advised not to touch by a caution label.

• Do not remove warning/caution labels.


If any caution label is removed or if any warning/caution label or caution indicator is
illegible due to soilage, clean the label. If cleaning does not render the label legible,
please contact your Konica service representative.

Safety Information 2-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Machine Installation and Power Requirements

CAUTION:
FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN BODILY INJURY AND/OR
MACHINE DAMAGE

❒ FIRE PREVENTION
Install machine away from flammable or volatile materials. Routinely check for abnormal
heat from power cord and/or plug.

❒ SHORT CIRCUIT FROM WATER DAMAGE


Do not install or operate this equipment outdoors near a lake, pond, or river, etc.; and do
not allow the machine to come in contact with splashes of rain, water, or any liquid.

❒ TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY


Install the machine away from direct sunlight, heat sources
(stoves, heaters) and cold temperatures (air conditioners).
Avoid any environment that is outside 50°C~86°F
(10°~30°C), with 10~80% humidity.

❒ VENTILATION
Do not allow the machine to come in contact with dust or
ammonia gas, or fumes from printing or cleaning solutions,
etc.; otherwise, image quality will be poor. Install the Temperature
machine in a well-ventilated area, for comfort; otherwise, an
ozone odor will be detected during large copy runs. When in
use, the copier generates ozone in amounts too small to be
hazardous to the human body.

❒ VIBRATIONS
If the machine is constantly vibrated or jolted, trouble may
occur. Install the machine on a level, horizontal floor, free
from vibrations. Vibration

❒ SPACE ALLOTMENT
Install machine in an area with adequate space for performing copier operations;
replacing supply items; and for conducting preventive maintenance. See Site
Requirements, Section 3.

❒ MACHINE RELOCATION
Before moving the machine to another location, contact your Konica service
representative.
2-6 Safety Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Machine Installation and Power Requirements (continued)

CAUTION:
FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE,
OVERHEATING, RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY

❒ PLUG SOCKET
A plug socket is limited in capacity. Use an exclusive power source for this machine;
otherwise, an accident from overheating and/or smoking may occur. The total power
consumption of the main body, plus all peripherals, must not exceed the capacity of the
main power supply.
For plug cable equipment, that the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment
and shall be easily accessible.

❒ PLUG AND CORD (LEAD)


Unless the power plug is firmly inserted into the socket, an accident from overheating
and/or smoking may occur. Firmly insert the power cord plug into the electrical outlet
before turning on the copier power switch. If the inserted plug is loose in the socket,
disconnect it, and consult an electrician for repair; but, do not attempt to operate the
machine.
For plug cable equipment, be sure that the socket-outlet shall be installed near the
equipment and shall be easily accessible.
A damaged power cord may result in overheating, short circuit or fire. Do not bend,
crush, wind, or kick the cord; or strike it with a desk or any item; or roll up the power
cord. If the main body power cord is bent or damaged, immediately contact your Konica
service representative; and do not attempt to repair it yourself, or continue to operate the
machine.

❒ ADAPTERS AND PLURAL LOADS


Never use adapters; and never connect plural loads or a branched socket to one socket
outlet; otherwise an accident may occur from overheating or fire.

❒ EXTENSION CORDS (LEADS)


An extension cord or lead is limited in capacity. Unless the cord or lead has adequate
capacity, smoking may occur, and an accident may be caused from overheating. Should
smoking and/or overheating occur, contact an electrician immediately. If you require
further information about power requirements, power consumption, extension cords,
adapters and connectors, please contact your Konica service representative, and also
consult your electrician.

Safety Information 2-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Machine Handling and Care

WARNING:
FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING WARNING MAY RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY
AND/OR MACHINE DAMAGE

❒ MACHINE CONTACT
Never touch internal high voltage area indicated with a WARNING label.
Never touch the drum surface.
Never put your hand into the developing unit when removing mishandled paper.

CAUTION:
FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE,
OVERHEATING, AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY

❒ MACHINE CONTACT
Never touch internal high temperature or magnetism areas indicated with a CAUTION label.
Never insert your hand into the fixing unit when removing mishandled paper.
Never touch the inside of the main body for any purpose except removing mishandled
paper or adding toner.
Use care when drawing out the conveyance fixing unit.

❒ MACHINE CARE
Do not drop paper clips, staples and other small metallic objects
into the copier; or spill water or any other liquid into the machine.
Do not use the machine surface to support vases, books, etc.
These items will interfere with the work space and may cause
damage to the machine or to original documents.

❒ ABNORMAL CONDITIONS
If any abnormal sound, odor, or smoke generates from the machine, immediately stop
using the copier, turn off the main power switch, disconnect the plug and contact your
Konica service representative.
If a circuit breaker is tripped, or if a fuse blows, stop using the machine and contact an
electrician. If more detailed information is needed regarding the power source or power
consumption of this machine, contact your Konica service representative.

2-8 Safety Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Machine Handling and Care (continued)

CAUTION:
FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE,
OVERHEATING, AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY

❒ MACHINE MODIFICATION
Do not modify the machine in any way or remove any part or
screw; and never attempt to perform any maintenance function
that is not specifically described in this manual. Do not connect
the machine with any options other than those specified.

❒ FINISHER OPERATION
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions
or into the grooves of the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be
injured.
To avoid injury when the Finisher middle exit tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT
your hand into the two portions of the closing area.

❒ PERIODIC CHECK
Check for loose connection or excessive heat on power plug, dust between power cord
and plug, damage to power cord and/or plug (creased, frayed, scratched or cut, etc.). Be
sure the plug is inserted fully, and ground wire is connected correctly. If any abnormality
occurs, do not continue to operate the machine.

❒ SERVICE MESSAGES
If a service message displays, turn the machine off, disconnect the power cord from the
outlet, and report the condition to your service representative.

❒ TONER
Check to be sure toner in storage is out of the reach of children, or anyone incapable of
using supplies safely. Although toner is nontoxic, do not inhale toner or allow it to come
in contact with eyes. If inhalation or eye contact occurs, immediately consult a physician.
Please refer to the appropriate material safety data sheet for additional toner safety
information.

❒ PAPER
Check paper to be sure it is according to specifications outlined in Section 4.

❒ RADF HINGES
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two RADF hinge portions, otherwise you may be
injured.
Safety Information 2-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Safety Information
Routine Safety

CAUTION:
FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE,
OVERHEATING, AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY

❒ CLEANING MATERIALS
Check the type of cleaning material used on your machine to be sure it is recommended
by Konica. If necessary, check with your Konica representative. Never use cleaning
materials for purposes other than cleaning, and be sure to keep all cleaning materials
out of the reach of children or anyone who is incapable of using them safely.

❒ POWER SAVER
Use Power Saver mode for short periods of machine inactivity. When not using the
machine for long periods of time, turn power off, except when the weekly timer function
is operating.

❒ DISPOSAL OF THE COPIER


Dispose of this copier according to your local regulations.

2-10 Safety Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 3: Machine Information

Machine Configuration
External Machine Call-Outs
Internal Machine Call-Outs
Standard and Optional Equipment Layout

Site Requirements
Control Panel Layout
Touch Screen
Basic Screen

Initial Settings
Auto/Reset Mode
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)
Automatic Exposure Selection (AES)
Automatic Tray Selection (ATS)
Lead Edge Delete
Service Settings
Key Operator Password
ECM Master Key Code
Weekly Timer Master Key Code
Display Messages: ADD TONER/PM CALL
Staple Sheet Capacity
Original Count Display
Paper Exit Switching of Finisher Tray
Paper Exit Switching of Finisher Tray in Staple-Sort Mode
ADVANCE & DELETE Keys on Job List Screen
ECM Password Entering After Setting Reserve Job
Control Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen

Machine Information 3-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Machine Configuration

External Machine

!9Control panel
!8LCD touch screen qRADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder)
!7Power switch

wWork table

eMullti-sheet (smart)
bypass tray
!6Main power switch
rKey counter
!5Finisher

tUpper right side cover

yLower right side cover

!4Left side cover


!3Front door

uADU
iTray 1
DB-608 oTray 2
!0Tray 3

oTray 2 oTray 2
!0Tray 3
DB-208 DB-208A
!2Storage
!1Tray 4

3-2 Machine Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Machine Configuration (continued)

External Machine Call-outs


1 RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds multiple originals one
at a time to the platen glass for copying.
2 Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and after copying.
3 Multi-sheet bypass tray used for small quantity copying onto plain paper or special paper.
4 Key counter (option) manages the number of copies made on the machine.
5 Upper right side cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
6 Lower right side cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
7 ADU is used for stackless duplex copying.
8 Tray 1 (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either 11"x17"/8.5"x14"/
8.5"x11"R/8.5"x11"/5.5"x8.5" or A4R.
9 Tray 2 (of DB-208/208A/608 option) (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of
either 11"x17"/8.5"x14"/8.5"x11"R/8.5"x11"/5.5"x8.5" or A4R.
10 Tray 3 (of DB-608 option) is initially fixed at 8.5"x11" and holds 1,500 sheets.
It can be reset by service to size 8.5"x11"R or A4R.
Tray 3 (of DB-208 option) (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either
11"x17"/8.5"x14"/8.5"x11"R/8.5"x11"/5.5"x8.5" or A4R.
11 Tray 4 (of DB-208 option) (universal tray) is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either
11"x17"/8.5"x14"/8.5"x11"R/8.5"x11"/5.5"x8.5" or A4R.
12 Storage accommodates copy paper, copy materials, etc.
13 Front door opens to the internal copier to allow clearing of mishandled paper and replenishing
of toner.
14 Left side cover opens to allow removal of mishandled paper.
15 Finisher (option) sorts, staple-sorts, and groups copies into finished sets.
16 Main power switch turns machine power On/Off to operate it as copier/printer.
17 Power switch turns copier power On/Off when pressed.
18 LCD touch screen displays interactive operation screens.
19 Control panel controls copier operations and displays messages as required.

Machine Information 3-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Machine Configuration (continued)

Internal Machine Call-outs

Internal Machine

i Total counter q Toner cartridge

w Toner unit

u Fixing unit
e Drum unit

r Knob 3

y Knob 2 t Lever 1

1 Toner Cartridge holds toner and is to be replaced when supplying toner.


2 Toner unit holds the toner supply.
3 Drum unit forms the copy image.
4 Knob 3 can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper.
5 Lever 1 can be moved to ease removal of mishandled paper.
6 Knob 2 can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper from the fixing unit.
7 Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper.
8 Total counter indicates the total number of copies made.

3-4 Machine Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Machine Configuration (continued)

Standard and Optional Equipment Layout


FS-109 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder - RADF
Finisher Work table
(see details Multi-Sheet
below) Bypass Tray
(100 sheets)
Automatic Duplex Automatic Duplex
Unit (ADU) Unit (ADU)
Tray 1 (500 sheets) Tray 1 (500 sheets)
Tray 2 (500 sheets) Tray 2 (500 sheets)
Tray 3 (500 sheets)
Tray 4 (500 sheets) Storage

Main Body + DB-208 Main Body + DB-208A

Automatic Duplex
Unit (ADU)
Tray 1 (500 sheets)
Tray 2 (500 sheets)
Tray 3: Large Capacity Tray
(1,500 sheets)
Main Body + DB-608

q Finisher upper tray: Ejects copy paper


in Non-sort mode.

t Release lever: Releases


the finisher from the main
body when clearing misfed
w Staple drive portions: paper or supplying staples.
Staples the exit set in
Staple-sort mode.

e Finisher middle
tray: Ejects copy
paper in Non-sort,
Sort, Group, or
Staple-sort mode.

r Finisher lower tray: y Cartridge holders: Holds staple


cartridges to be replaced when
Ejects copy paper in Non-
supplying staples.
sort, Sort, Group, or
Staple-sort mode.

Machine Information 3-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Site Requirements Unit: inches (mm)

19.7 31.5 27.8 7.9


(500) (800) 27.0 (706) (200)
15.7 25.5 17.0 (687)
(400) (647) (431)

64.8
(1645)

45.1
(1145)
39.2
(995)

58.2 67.2
(1477) (1706)
Main Body + DB-208
Unit: inches (mm)

19.7 31.5 27.8 7.9


(500) (800) 27.0 (706) (200)
15.7 25.5 17.0 (687)
(400) (647) (431)

64.8
(1645)

45.1
(1145)
39.2
(995)

58.2 67.2
(1477) (1706)
Main Body + DB-208A
Unit: inches (mm)
31.5 27.8 7.9
19.7
(500) (800) 27.0 (706) (200)
10.6 21.5 25.5 17.0 (687)
(270) (545) (647) (431)

64.8
(1645)
45.1
(1145)

47.0 (1193) 67.2


55.1 (1399) (1706)
74.5 (1893)
* Dimensions required when the Finisher is withdrawn.
Main Body + FS-109 + DB-608
NOTE: Dimensions are in inches with millimeters included in parentheses.

3-6 Machine Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Control Panel Layout

q w e r t y u io !0 !1

DATA

SCAN PRINT COPY TIMER

CHECK HELP
INTERRUPT POWER SAVER
1 2 3 ON / OFF
APPLICATION

4 5 6 PROOF COPY

OUTPUT

7 8 9 STOP / CLEAR

JOB MEMORY

0
START
AUTO RESET CLEAR QTY.

@0 !9 !8 !7 !6 !5 !4 !3 !2

1 LCD SCREEN displays machine and copying status; help information; interactive screens; and
touch keys for selecting all functions.
2 CHECK displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job.
3 HELP displays a screen with help for the currently selected function or to access the Key
Operator Mode Screen.
4 SCAN switches the machine operation mode to scanner.
5 KEYPAD enters numeric values.
6 PRINT accesses printing mode for network.
7 COPY switches the machine operation mode to copy.
8 INTERRUPT stops copying/printing/scanning in progress to allow copying.
9 DATA blinks while receiving print data in printer mode, then lights after completing it.
10 TIMER lights when the timer function is set.
11 POWER SAVER ON/OFF activates power-saving mode for times when the copier is inactive,
or activates timer interrupt mode when weekly timer function is active.
12 STOP/CLEAR stops the copying sequence; deletes the stored memory.
13 START activates copying or scanning.
14 PROOF COPY outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings are
selected properly.
15 CLEAR QTY. allows resetting of print quantity.
16 [P] displays the Counter Screen or accesses programming modes for setting special functions.
17 APPLICATION displays a menu for selecting special application functions.
18 AUTO RESET restores copier to automatic mode settings or to key operator settings.
19 JOB MEMORY displays screens for selecting job store/job recall functions.
20 OUTPUT displays a screen for selecting an output condition.

Machine Information 3-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Touch Screen

The touch screen is an LCD that displays interactive screens with touch sensitive keys
for making copy job selections. Selections are highlighted at the touch. The screens also
work with the conventional control panel keys.

CAUTION:
The touch screen of the control panel is covered with glass. Do not drop heavy items on the glass, or
put excess weight or pressure on it; otherwise the glass may break or become scratched.

After the power switch is turned on, the Konica name displays for approximately 10
seconds, until initial machine settings are established. Then, the message “Warming up”
displays on the Basic Screen for approximately 90 seconds, until the fixing temperature
is reached.

When the Basic Screen is displayed, the touch screen becomes interactive. The
interactive condition enables you to communicate directly with the copier system simply
by touching keys displayed on the screen; or by pressing conventional keys, as required.
In addition, the screens automatically display information regarding machine and
copying status. Additional help is available any time with the [HELP] key, which can be
pressed from any screen except the Job Memory or Key Operator Mode screen.

Basic Screen
The Basic Screen displays while warming up. The
initial settings are described on the next page.
Except for Print Quantity, all initial settings can be
changed by the key operator.
The following modes can be accessed from this
screen:
Copy Mode, Copy Density, Lens Mode, Copy Size.

3-8 Machine Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Initial Settings

Initial settings represent the initial condition when power is turned on; when ECM
password is set; or when Auto/Reset mode is restored, either manually or automatically.

Print Quantity: 1
Magnification Ratio: 1:1 (key operator setting)
RADF: ON (key operator setting)
Copy mode: 1-1 mode (key operator setting)
AES: (Automatic Exposure Selection) : ON (key operator setting)
APS: (Automatic Paper Selection): ON (key operator setting)
Machine with Finisher
Finisher: non-sort on Exit tray 2 (key operator setting)

Auto/Reset Mode
The Auto/Reset function can be set by the key operator for OFF/ 30 seconds/ 1 minute/
1.5 minutes/ 2 minutes/ 2.5 minutes/ 3 minutes/ 3.5 minutes/ 4 minutes/ 4.5 minutes/ 5
minutes. Initially, the mode is set to function after 1 minute of copier inactivity. The Auto/
Reset key function also re-displays the Basic Screen, unless these settings are changed
by the key operator in the Initial Setting Menu Screen. See p. 11-46 to p. 11-50.

Automatic Paper Selection (APS)


When APS is highlighted on the touch screen, the appropriate copy paper size is
automatically selected. When copying from the platen glass or document feeder, APS
detects the sizes indicated below. For key operator settings of APS, see p. 11-46 to p.
11-50.
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"R, 5.5"x8.5",
A4R (8.27"x11.69", 210mmx297mm), A4

Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)


AMS functions automatically when Copy Size is pressed in the Full-Auto mode. An
appropriate ratio is selected, based on the relationship of copy size to original size.

Automatic Exposure Selection (AES)


When AES is highlighted on the touch screen, the appropriate exposure level is
automatically selected to match the copy density of the original. Manual density
adjustments override AES.

Machine Information 3-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Automatic Tray Selection (ATS)

When the selected paper tray becomes empty while copying is in progress, automatic tray
switching detects the same copy paper size loaded in another tray to allow copying to be
continued without interruption. The Multi-sheet bypass tray is included in tray switching.

Lead Edge Delete


When using the RADF, image deletion of a few millimeters will occur on the lead edge
for the purpose of controlling copy quality and copy reliability. This feature can be
deactivated by the key operator. See p. 11-46 to p. 11-50.

3-10 Machine Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Service Settings

The following functions can be provided by your Konica service representative, who is
authorized to change DIP switch settings. Contact your service representative if setting
change is required.

Key Operator Password


Service can set a 4-digit Key Operator Password to limit access to the Key Operator
Mode. When this setting is on, a Password Entry Screen prompts the user to enter a 4-
digit password to access the Key Operator Mode Screen.

ECM Master Key Code


Service can set an 8-digit ECM Master Key Code to limit access to the ECM Setting
Menu Screen. When this setting is on, an ECM Master Key Code Screen prompts the
user to enter the 8-digit code to access the ECM Setting Menu Screen.

Weekly Timer Master Key Code


Service can set a 4-digit Weekly Timer Master Key Code to limit access to the Weekly
Timer Setting Menu Screen. When this setting is on, a screen message prompts the
user to enter a 4-digit code to access the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.

Display Messages: ADD TONER/PM CALL


Service can set the message area of the copier screen to display “ADD TONER” when
toner supply is low, or “PM CALL” when preventive maintenance is required.

Staple Sheet Capacity


Staple capacity in the normal mode is changeable, and may be set to 45, 40, or 35 by
service. (default setting: 50)
Staple capacity in the thick paper mode is changeable, and may be set to 25, 15, or 10
by service. (default setting: 20)

Original Count Display


Service can set the Job No. icon on the touch screen to display the page count while
scanning originals, and also the page number currently printed when printing job starts.

Machine Information 3-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Machine Information
Service Settings (continued)

Paper Exit Switching of Finisher Tray


When the amount of copies delivered onto the Finisher tray (upper, middle or lower)
exceeds its limit, the copier automatically shifts the output to another tray to complete
the output job. If you desire to release this function, contact your service representative.
See p. 7-3.

Paper Exit Switching of Finisher Tray in Staple-Sort Mode


When the amount of copies exceeds 25 sets in Staple-sort mode, the copier
automatically shifts the output from the Finisher middle tray to the lower tray, to complete
the output job. If you desire to use this function, contact your service representative.

ADVANCE & DELETE Keys on Job List Screen


The copier initially displays ADVANCE and DELETE keys on Job List Screen. Service
can make these keys appear grayed out on the screen.

ECM Password Entering After Setting Reserve Job


If ECM is activated on your copier, the copier starts the reserve job only when entering
your 5-digit ECM password using the keypad, after setting the reserve job.
If you desire to use this function, contact your service representative.

Control Panel Contrast Key in Help Screen


Service can set the copier to display Control panel contrast key on the Help Screen to
display the Contrast Adjustment Screen for adjusting panel contrast.

3-12 Machine Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 4: Paper Information

Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass


Positioning an Original for Manual Copying

Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)


Positioning Originals
Positioning Mixed Originals

Paper in Main Body Trays


Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit
Paper in Finisher
Paper Weight Compatibility Chart

Paper Information 4-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Paper Information
Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass

Positioning an Original for Manual Copying


Use the platen glass when originals are not suitable for use with the document feeder,
e.g., when size is incompatible, or when originals are folded, stapled, torn, or in
generally poor condition. When copying from the platen glass, Automatic Paper
Selection (APS) operates unless the setting is changed by the key operator.

Specifications
❒ All capacities are stated for 20 lb bond paper
❒ Max. original size: 11"x17" (280mmx432mm), sheet or book
❒ Max. book weight/thickness: 15 lb [6.8kg]/1.2" [30mm]
❒ Original placement: Face down in left rear corner of glass
❒ Orientation (portrait-landscape): Same as copy paper

1 Raise the document cover, as shown in the illustration below.


2 Place original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner, aligning the edge with the left
measuring guide.
3 Gently close the document cover, to prevent the original from shifting on the glass.

TIP:
To eliminate black copy marks on edges when copying from a book without selecting Book Copy mode, select
Frame/Fold Erasure or Non-image Area Erase in Application mode.

4-2 Paper Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Paper Information
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)

Specifications
❒ All capacities are stated for 20 lb bond paper
❒ Max. RADF tray capacity: 50 sheets
❒ Max. original exit tray capacity: 50 sheets
❒ Original size range: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, A4
(280mm x 432mm~140mm x 216mm) [See note.]
❒ Original placement: Face up; orientation same as copy paper
❒ Orientation (portrait-landscape): Same as copy paper feeding direction
❒ Original weight: 16 lb~32 lb (no special stock)
❒ Curling tolerance/stack height: 10mm or less/20mm or less

ADF MODE 1-1, 1-2


Original size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, A4
Max. feeder capacity: 50 original sheets

RADF MODE 2-2, 2-1


Original size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, A4
Max. feeder capacity: 50 original sheets

MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL MODE


Original size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R mixed.
Mixed feeder capacity: 50 original sheets

Unsuitable RADF Originals

1 2 3

Curled, creased or Paste-ups


folded originals or cut-outs Books

4 5 6

Glossy or transparent (OHP) Folded, punched


film, art paper, cellophane or stapled originals Thin or thick originals

NOTE: Use only paper recommended by Konica Business Technologies, Inc.

Paper Information 4-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Paper Information
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) (continued)

Positioning Originals
The document feeder (RADF) automatically feeds up to 50 originals directly to the platen
glass, starting with the top sheet. The RADF should only be used for unstapled,
unfolded, smooth, flat originals.

❒ Original size detection requires accurate paper guide adjustment


❒ APS detects size 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, and A4
❒ Size, weight and capacity are specified for all copy modes on p. 4-3

Before placing originals in the tray, be sure the document feeder is closed fully.
1 Position original(s) FACE UP on the document feeder tray.
Place two-sided originals with page one FACE UP.
2 Adjust paper guides.

4-4 Paper Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Paper Information
Using the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) (continued)

Positioning Mixed Originals


Mixed size originals can be copied together from the document feeder in either APS
mode or AMS mode. In APS mode, copies will be output on mixed paper sizes to match
the originals. In AMS mode, copies will be output on one common paper size that you
select in which case an appropriate AMS magnification ratio will be selected
automatically. To use the mixed original mode, see procedure on p. 8-23 to p. 8-24.

❒ Mixed original size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11" and 5.5"x8.5" mixed (16 lb~32 lb)
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" and 5.5"x8.5" mixed (16 lb~32 lb)
5.5"x8.5"R original is available in horizontal direction only.
❒ RADF capacity: Max. 50 sheets
❒ Print quantity: Max. 999 sheets
❒ Incompatible: Rotation exit, Staple-sort, V/H zoom, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination,
Booklet, Transparency Interleaving and Thin/Thick Paper modes in Special Paper, Image
Insert, Book Copy, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP/
OVERLAY

Before using the Mixed Original mode, be sure the document feeder is closed
completely.
1 Arrange originals in order, and place them as described below:
Place 11"x17"/8.5"x14" originals face up or side 1 up in the document feeder, in
landscape orientation, i.e., with short edge feeding.
Position 8.5"x11" and 5.5"x8.5" sizes in either portrait or landscape orientation.
2 Position mixed originals FACE UP, aligned with the left rear side of the RADF tray.
3 Adjust the original guide to originals.

Paper Information 4-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Paper Information
Paper in Main Body Trays

Paper Weight: 16 lb~24 lb


Total Paper Capacity
Main body with DB-208: 2,100 sheets, including 100-sheet Multi-Sheet Bypass
Tray 1~4: 500 sheets 20lb/ user-adjustable to any standard size from 11"x17"~5.5"x8.5"

Main body with DB-208A: 1,100 sheets, including 100-sheet Multi-Sheet Bypass
Tray 1, 2: 500 sheets 20lb/ user-adjustable to any standard size from 11"x17"~5.5"x8.5"
Main body with DB-608: 2,600 sheets, including 100-sheet Multi-Sheet Bypass
Tray 1, 2: 500 sheets 20lb/ user-adjustable to any standard size from 11"x17"~5.5"x8.5"
Tray 3: 1,500 sheets 20lb/ fixed to 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R or A4R (service adjustable)

Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray

Paper Size: Adjustable from 11"x17"~5.5"x8.5"R


Paper Weight: 16 lb~32 lb; Special (transparency films, labels, hole punch, rag content)
Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray Capacity: 100 sheets 20 lb stacked: single feed special stock

Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit

Paper Size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", or 5.5"x8.5"R


Paper Weight: 20 lb~24 lb
Duplex Tray Capacity: Unlimited stackless duplex tray

NOTE: Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all Special papers. Use only paper that is
recommended by Konica.
4-6 Paper Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Paper Information
Paper in Finisher

The In-Bin Stapler Finisher handles Ledger (11"x17"), Letter/R (11"x8.5"/8.5"x11") and
Invoice/R (8.5"x5.5"/5.5"x8.5"). Invoice (5.5"x8.5") size can be output with one staple but
not two staples.

FS-109 In-Bin Stapler Finisher (capacities at 20lb, unless otherwise indicated)


Non-sort mode
Finisher upper tray: 100 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R,
5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4)
10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.)
Finisher middle/lower tray: 700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)
Sort/Group/Staple-sort mode
Finisher middle/lower tray: 700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)

Paper Exit Switching Function of Finisher Tray


When the amount of copies delivered onto the Finisher tray (upper, middle or lower)
exceeds its limit described below, the copier automatically shifts the output to another
tray to complete the output job.
Finisher upper tray:
After 100 sheets (irrespective of the paper size) are delivered, the output shifts to
the middle, then lower tray.
Finisher middle tray:
After 300 sheets (11"x17" or 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5")/700 sheets (8.5"x11" or A4) are
delivered, the output shifts to the lower tray.
Finisher lower tray:
After 300 sheets (11"x17" or 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5")/700 sheets (8.5"x11" or A4) are
delivered, the output shifts to the middle tray.

The 7045 copier does not default to this Paper Exit Switching function. If you desire to
activate this function, contact your service representative.

NOTE: When the print quantity selected exceeds the finisher capacity, the copier automatically stops printing
before the number of discharged copies exceeds the capacity. Remove the copies from the tray, then
press [START] to complete the job.

Paper Information 4-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Paper Information
Paper Weight Compatibility Chart

RADF Document Feeder 16 ~ 32 lb


Main Body and DB-208/208A/608 Trays All Trays 20 ~ 24 lb
Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray 16 ~ 32 lb
ADU 20 ~ 24 lb
FS-109 In-Bin Stapler Finsher 16 ~ 32 lb

NOTE: Reliability and copy quantity are not guaranteed for all Special papers. Use only paper that is
recommended by Konica.

4-8 Paper Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 5: Copier Management

Power Saver Mode


Auto Low Power
Manual Shut-Off
Auto Shut-Off

Entering an ECM Password


Weekly Timer Function
Timer Interrupt

Counter List
To Display the Counter List
To Print the Counter List

Machine Information 5-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Copier Management
Power Saver Mode

There are two modes for the Power saver as described below.
Low power mode enables you to conserve energy by maintaining a lower fixing
temperature during periods of copier inactivity.
Shut-off mode conserves even more energy by partially turning OFF the power supply.

Auto Low Power


This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity.
The Auto low power function can be set to 5 minutes/ 10 minutes/ 15 minutes/ 30
minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240 minutes. Initially, the mode is set to
function after 15 minutes of copier inactivity. For the key operator setting, see p. 11-44 to
p. 11-45.
When Auto low power is on, the following message will be displayed on the dimmed
Basic screen. The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED remains dark.

Release Auto Low Power


Press any key on the Control panel other than [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The Auto low
power will be released and the LCD screen recovers usual brightness.

5-2 Copier Management

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Copier Management
Power Saver Mode (continued)

Manual Shut-Off
Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The [POWER SAVER ON/OFF] LED will light and all other
LEDs and the LCD screen will be turned off.

Release Manual Shut-Off


Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The Manual shut-off will be released, with the [POWER
SAVER ON/OFF] LED turned off and the LCD screen displayed.

Auto Shut-Off
This function automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier
inactivity.
The Auto shut-off can be set for 30 minutes/ 60 minutes/ 90 minutes/ 120 minutes/ 240
minutes. Initially, Auto shut-off is set to function after 60 minutes of copier inactivity. For
the key operator setting, see p. 11-44 to p. 11-45.

Release Auto Shut-Off


Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The copying operation will be available.

Copier Management 5-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Copier Management
Entering an ECM Password

An ECM password is required only when the Electronic Copy Monitor (ECM) feature is
activated; a User Password is assigned; and “Enter E.C.M. password” is displayed on
the touch screen.

1 Enter your 5-digit ECM password, using the keypad.


If the ECM password is invalid, the copier will reset to the Initial mode.
In that case, enter the correct password; or contact the key operator.
2 Press [START] once to display your current copy count and copy limit for 3 sec.

Current count / limit


018888/025000

Ready to copy

When your copy count reaches the copy limit, the following message is displayed:

Copy limit reached


025001/025000

In that case, contact the key operator to reset your copy limit.
3 Make copying selections, and enter print quantity, as required.
4 When all settings are acceptable, press [START].

5-4 Copier Management

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Copier Management
Weekly Timer Function

When a copier is under control of the weekly timer function, the TIMER indicator on the
right side of the Control panel is lit.
IMPORTANT: WHEN THE TIMER INDICATOR IS LIT, THE COPIER WILL TURN OFF
AUTOMATICALLY. DO NOT TURN IT OFF BY PRESSING POWER SWITCH.

Timer Interrupt
When the TIMER indicator light is on and other indicators are off, copying is unavailable
due to the weekly timer function.

However, copying is available by using the following procedure.

DATA

TIMER

RUPT POWER SAVER


ON / OFF

COPY

STOP / CLEAR

1 Press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF].


The Basic screen will be displayed along with the messages shown below.

Please wait
Copier is warming up

Timer interrupt mode


Enter password

NOTE: The timer interrupt password is not factory set but is entered by the key operator (see p.11-42 in
“Section 11: Key Operator Mode”). In the event the timer interrupt password has not been entered by
the Key Operator, the message shown in Step 3 will display instead.

Copier Management 5-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Copier Management
Weekly Timer Function (continued)

2 Use the keypad on the control panel to enter the 4-digit timer interrupt password.
If an invalid password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.

Timer interrupt mode


Enter password ✻✻✻✻

3 Press [START].

Input copy time


0 hour(s) 05 minute(s)

4 Use the keypad to enter the hours in 1 digit. For example, enter [3] for three hours.
5 Press [START].

Your copy time is


3 hour(s) 05 minute(s)

6 Use the keypad to enter the minutes in 2 digits. For example, enter [0] [7] for seven
minutes.

Your copy time is


3 hour(s) 07 minute(s)

7 Press [START].
Copying is available until the set time is up.

Align original on RADF unit

When the timer interrupt job is finished, press [POWER SAVER ON/OFF]. The copier
returns to the OFF condition and copying is again disabled.

5-6 Copier Management

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Copier Management
Counter List

This function allows you to view the total count calculated, as displayed on the touch
panel. Check the count, then print it from the Counter List Screen, if desired.

Control Panel Counter List Screen

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0
CLEAR QTY.

To Display the Counter List


1 Press [P] to display the Counter List Screen.
The Total count is only displayed on the Counter List Screen.
2 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.

To Print the Counter List


1 Press [P] to display the Counter List Screen.
2 To print the Total count, touch PRINT.
The Management list mode will be released.

Copier Management 5-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations Section 6: Basic Operations

How to Make a Basic Copy


The Basic Screen

Copy Mode
Copy Mode Using RADF
1-2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass

Copy Density
Automatic Exposure Selection (AES)
Manual Mode (Lighter, Normal, Darker)

Lens Mode
Automatic Paper Selection (APS)
Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)
Preset and User Set Ratios
Zoom Mode
Special Ratio Table
Vertical/Horizontal Zoom

Copy Size
Selecting Copy Size
Selecting Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray

Reserve
Set Reserve Job
Mishandled Paper During Reserve Setting
When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress

Job List Screen


Store Mode
Platen Store Mode
RADF Store Mode

Rotation
Rotation and APS
Rotation and AMS
To Release Automatic Rotation

Check Mode and Proof Copy


Interrupt Mode
Help Mode
Basic Operations 6-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
How to Make a Basic Copy

The Basic Screen


When power is turned on, the Basic Screen displays while warming up; when Auto
Power Saver mode is activated; when ECM password is set; when Key counter is used;
or when Auto/Reset mode is manually or automatically restored.
All copying selections can be initiated from the Basic Screen, whether selected with
screen keys or conventional keys, such as Application and Output.
Some screen keys display a popup menu when touched, to make more detailed copying
selections.
When the Electronic Copy Monitor (ECM) is activated, a valid 5-digit ECM password,
assigned by the key operator, must be entered before copying can be performed. See p.
11-21 to p. 11-23.
All of the settings in the Basic Screen, except Print Quantity, can be changed by the key
operator in the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.

Job list key


Basic Screen Scan key
Messages and
Copier Status Output quantity/
Enter quantity display
Icon area*
Folder keys Memory indicator

Settings Options

*: The following icons will be displayed in the icon area.


Add toner icon, Preventive maintenance icon, Staple position icon,
Finisher mode icon, Rotation icon, Application icon (usually displayed
above the Reserve folder key), Job number icon.

NOTES:
1 During the process of successive copying jobs, the message “Warming up” may be displayed in the
message area of the Basic Screen to maintain the copy image quality.
2 When turning the main power switch OFF then ON, be sure to take an interval of 3 seconds or longer
before turning it ON again; otherwise the machine may not operate normally.

6-2 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations

How to Make a Basic Copy (continued)

The Basic Screen (continued)


1 Check that the main power switch on the rear-left side of the copier is turned on,
then turn on the power switch at the far left of the control panel. The Basic Screen
will be displayed.
The machine takes approximately 30 seconds to go through a warm-up.
2 Set the copying conditions, as required.
3 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad. The entered quantity
will be displayed on the upper right message area of the Basic Screen.
To change the print quantity, press [C] (CLEAR QTY.), then enter the correct quantity.
NOTE: Do not press [STOP/CLEAR]; otherwise the scanned image may be cleared.
4 Position the original document FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on
the platen glass.
HINTS:
1 For details on positioning originals, see p. 4-2 and p. 4-4.
2 For original and copy paper information, see Section 4.
5 Press [START] to scan.
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the
remaining memory.
Printing job starts in succession when the machine becomes ready for output.
To suspend the scanning or printing job and delete all the data, press [STOP/CLEAR].
After copying is completed, all the scanned data will be deleted automatically.
Press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the machine.

Basic Copy Settings on Basic Screen


Copy mode : see p. 6-4 ~ p. 6-6
Copy density : see p. 6-7
Lens mode : see p. 6-8 ~ p. 6-14
Copy size : see p. 6-15 ~ p. 6-16
Reserve and Job list : see p. 6-17 ~ p. 6-22
Store mode : see p. 6-23 ~ p. 6-25
Rotation : see p. 6-26 ~ p. 6-28
Check mode and Proof copy : see p. 6-29 ~ p. 6-30
Interrupt mode : see p. 6-31 ~ p. 6-32
Help mode : see p. 6-33
Section 7 describes how to select Output modes.
Section 8 describes how to select Application functions.
Section 10 describes shortcuts of basic and applicaton operating.

Basic Operations 6-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Copy Mode

Copy Mode Specifications


❒ Incompatible functions
1-1: Chapter; Booklet
1-2: Transparency Interleave
2-1: Chapter; Booklet; Book Copy; Repeat; AUTO Layout; Non-Image Area Erase
2-2: Transparency Interleave; Repeat; Book Copy; AUTO Layout; Non-Image Area
Erase
❒ RADF capacity
1-1, 1-2, 2-2, 2-1: 50 sheets
(copying can be resumed after removing paper from bins)
❒ RADF original size requirements
1-1, 1-2, 2-2, 2-1: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R, A4
(8.27"x11.69", 210mmx297mm)

2-2 Copying

7045
7045

7045
7045

Double-sided original Duplex copy

7045
7045
1-2 Copying 7045
7045
7045

7045
7045 Duplex copy
Single-sided originals

7045
7045
2-1 Copying 7045
7045
7045

7045
Double-sided original
7045
Simplex copy

6-4 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Copy Mode (continued)

Copy Mode Using RADF


Before selecting the Copy Mode shown on the screen below, read specifications on the
previous page and see Section 4 for information on original/copy paper and positioning
originals.

Basic Screen (with 1-1 mode selected)

1 Touch the desired MODE key: zsz, zsx, xsz, or xsx.


A copy mode key will appear dimmed if it is incompatible with other selections made.
2 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.
3 When all settings are acceptable, press [START].
To cancel the mode, touch the desired MODE key on the Basic Screen.

NOTE: When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected, remove the copied sets
while the paper is exiting; otherwise, mishandled paper will occur.

Basic Operations 6-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Copy Mode (continued)

1-2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass


When copying in 1-2 mode from the platen glass, use the Platen store mode. Refer to p.
4-2 for details on positioning originals.

❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF


❒ Incompatible Applications: Transparency Interleave, Image Insert

Basic Screen (with 1-2 mode selected)

1 Open the document feeder. The RADF indication on the Basic Screen will disappear
and the xsz and xsx keys will be dimmed to show inactivity.
2 Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the document feeder.
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION.
3 Touch zsx, then make the desired copying selections.
Some function keys will appear dimmed if they are incompatible with other selections
made.
4 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
5 Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen. The original image will be stored into memory.
6 Repeat steps 1, 2, and 5 until all originals are scanned.
To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/CLEAR].
7 Press [START] to print.

6-6 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Copy Density

Automatic Exposure Selection (AES)


AES operates with the initial settings. It detects the density of the original image and
automatically selects the appropriate exposure for the copy.
To select AES, touch AUTO on the Basic Screen or press [AUTO RESET] on the control
panel to restore the initial settings. The AUTO key will be highlighted.

Light original Copy Dark original

Manual Mode (Lighter, Normal, Darker)


Select manual copy density to adjust exposure (density) when originals are too light or
too dark. Manual adjustments can be made in 9 levels simply by touching the lighter
▼ ), NORMAL, or darker arrow (▲) key to highlight the desired exposure level
arrow (▼
indicator.
Basic Screen

NOTE: Key operator can set the copier to shift each of nine density levels into two levels of lighter and three
levels of darker. See p. 11-54.

Basic Operations 6-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Lens Mode

Automatic Paper Selection (APS)


APS detects the size of originals placed on the RADF or platen glass and automatically
selects and feeds copy paper of the same size, or selects an appropriate size according
to the magnification ratio selected.
If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray, no copying will be performed, and
a message will prompt you to load the appropriate paper.

❒ Original sizes detected are: 11”x17”, 8.5”x14”, 8.5”x11”, 8.5”x11”R, 5.5”x8.5”, 5.5”x8.5”R
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: AMS, Change magnification
❒ Incompatible Applications: Book Copy, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase

The relation of original size, magnification ratio and copy paper size is shown below.

Copy size Original size Copy size


11x17 8.5x14 8.5x11 8.5x11R 5.5x8.5
0.25 - 0.50 5.5x8.5R 0.25 - 0.50
5.5x8.5R
0.51 - 0.61 8.5x11R 5.5x8.5R 5.5x8.5R 0.51 - 0.61
(8.5x11)
0.62 - 0.65 0.62 - 0.65
Magnification ratio

Magnification ratio
8.5x11R 5.5x8.5R
0.66 - 0.77 8.5x14 (8.5x11) 0.66 - 0.77
8.5x11 8.5x11R
0.78 - 0.79 (8.5x11R) (8.5x11) 0.78 - 0.79
0.80 - 1.00 8.5x14 0.80 - 1.00
8.5x11
1.01 - 1.29 11x17 (8.5x11R) 1.01 - 1.29
1.30 - 1.55 11x17 11x17 11x17 8.5x14 1.30 - 1.55
1.56 - 4.00 11x17 1.56 - 4.00
( ): Rotation functions

6-8 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)

Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS)


AMS is one of the initial settings that functions when the RADF is used and a Copy Size
is selected manually. See p. 6-15.

❒ Incompatible: APS, Change magnification, Book Copy, Non-Image Area Erase, Repeat, AUTO
Layout

An appropriate reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically and applied


to the image on the copy size. AMS automatically calculates and selects the correct
ratio.

AMS ratios are shown in the table below.

ORIGINAL SIZE
AMS TABLE
11"x17" 8.5"x14" 8.5"x11"R 8.5"x11" 5.5"x8.5" 5.5"x8.5"R

11"x17" 1.00 1.21 1.30 1.00 1.30 2.02

8.5"x14" 0.76 1.00 1.00 0.76 1.00 1.56


COPY SIZE

(1.00)

8.5"x11"R 0.64 0.78 1.00 0.76 1.00 1.30


(1.00) (1.30)

8.5"x11" 0.49 0.60 0.76 1.00 1.30 1.00


(0.64) (0.78) (1.00) (1.30)

0.48 0.60 0.63 0.48 0.63 1.00


5.5"x8.5" (0.63) (1.00)

( ): Rotation functions

Basic Operations 6-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)

Preset and User Set Ratios


Use the Preset and User Set ratios to increase or decrease magnification in fixed
amounts.

Three User Set ratios are adjustable by the key operator. All ratios remain effective until
they are replaced.
NOTE: If required, the six initially set Preset ratios shown below can be adjusted in the Key Operator mode.
Contact your Konica service representative.

❒ 1:1 mode (no magnification)


❒ 6 Preset ratios: 11”x17”s5.5”x8.5” (0.50), 8.5”x14”s5.5”x8.5” (0.65), 11”x17”s8.5”x11” (0.77),
8.5”x11”s11”x17” (1.29), 5.5”x8.5”s8.5”x14” (1.55), and 5.5”x8.5”s11”x17” (2.00)
❒ 3 User Set ratios: Programmable by key operator and selected from 0.25~4.00
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: AMS
❒ Incompatible Applications: Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift

Basic Screen

1 Touch RE to display the popup menu for selecting the desired preset/userset ratio.
2 Select the desired magnification. The selected key will be highlighted, then the
popup menu disappears automatically.
3 The selected ratio is displayed on the Basic Screen.
To cancel the setting after returning to the Basic Screen, touch RE again, then select
the desired ratio.

6-10 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)

Zoom Mode
Use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 1% increments.

❒ Zoom range: 0.25~4.00


❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: AMS
❒ Incompatible Applications: Repeat mode in Repeat, Reduce & Shift in Image Shift

Basic Screen

Zoom key

1 Touch ZOOM to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio.
2 Use keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired reduction or enlargement ratio
in 3 digits; or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio.
NOTE: If an incorrect ratio is entered, continue by entering the correct 3-digit ratio.
3 When the desired ratio is specified, touch OK to complete the setting. The popup
menu disappears automatically.
To cancel the setting after returning to the Basic Screen, touch ZOOM again, enter
the desired ratio, then touch OK.

Basic Operations 6-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)

Special Ratio Table


To determine reduction or enlargement ratios when using non-standard paper sizes,
follow the procedure below using the special ratio table provided here.

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

17 3.40 2.83 2.43 2.12 1.88 1.70 1.54 1.42 1.31 1.21 1.13 1.06 1.00 17
3.00 2.54 2.20 1.94 1.74 1.57 1.43 1.32 1.22 1.14 1.06 1.00

16 3.20 2.67 2.28 2.00 1.77 1.60 1.45 1.33 1.23 1.14 1.06 1.00 0.94 16
2.81 2.38 2.06 1.82 1.63 1.47 1.35 1.24 1.15 1.07 1.00 0.94

15 3.00 2.50 2.14 1.87 1.67 1.50 1.36 1.25 1.15 1.07 1.00 0.94 0.88 15
2.64 2.23 1.93 1.70 1.53 1.38 1.26 1.16 1.07 1.00 0.93 0.88

14 2.80 2.33 2.00 1.75 1.55 1.40 1.30 1.17 1.07 1.00 0.93 0.87 0.82 14
2.45 2.07 1.80 1.59 1.42 1.28 1.17 1.08 1.00 0.93 0.87 0.82

13 2.60 2.17 1.86 1.62 1.44 1.30 1.18 1.08 1.00 0.92 0.87 0.81 0.76 13
2.27 1.92 1.67 1.47 1.31 1.19 1.09 1.00 0.92 0.86 0.81 0.76

12 2.40 2.00 1.71 1.50 1.33 1.20 1.09 1.00 0.92 0.86 0.80 0.75 0.70 12
2.09 1.77 1.53 1.35 1.21 1.09 1.00 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.74 0.70

2.20 1.83 1.57 1.37 1.22 1.11 1.00 0.92 0.85 0.78 0.73 0.69 0.65
COPY SIZE

11 11
1.91 1.61 1.40 1.23 1.10 1.00 0.91 0.84 0.78 0.72 0.68 0.64

10 2.00 1.67 1.43 1.25 1.11 1.00 0.91 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.67 0.62 0.59 10
1.73 1.46 1.27 1.12 1.00 0.90 0.83 0.76 0.70 0.65 0.61 0.57

9 1.80 1.50 1.29 1.12 1.00 0.90 0.82 0.75 0.69 0.64 0.60 0.56 0.53 9
1.54 1.30 1.13 1.00 0.89 0.81 0.74 0.68 0.63 0.59 0.55 0.51

8 1.60 1.33 1.14 1.00 0.89 0.80 0.73 0.67 0.61 0.57 0.53 0.50 0.47 8
1.36 1.15 1.00 0.88 0.79 0.71 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.52 0.48 0.45

7 1.40 1.17 1.00 0.87 0.77 0.70 0.64 0.58 0.54 0.50 0.47 0.44 0.41 7
1.18 1.00 0.86 0.76 0.68 0.62 0.56 0.52 0.48 0.45 0.42 0.39

1.20 1.00 0.85 0.75 0.66 0.60 0.54 0.50 0.46 0.43 0.40 0.37 0.35
6 6
1.00 0.84 0.73 0.65 0.58 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.41 0.38 0.35 0.33

1.00 0.83 0.71 0.62 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.42 0.38 0.36 0.33 0.31 0.29
5 5

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

ORIGINAL SIZE

To find ORIGINAL-COPY WIDTH magnification ratio:


1 Locate the original width on the horizontal axis.
2 Locate the copy width on the vertical axis.
3 Find the ratio on the table where these two values meet.
Repeat the same procedure to find ORIGINAL-COPY LENGTH magnification ratio.

The ratio you use must fall within the available magnification range of 0.25~4.00.
Use the smaller ratio for reduction and use the larger ratio for enlargement.
When the correct ratio is determined, follow the procedure for using Zoom mode.

6-12 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom
Use the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or
enlarge vertical and horizontal dimensions, independently.
Width

Length
❒ Vertical/Horizontal zoom range: 0.25~4.00
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS, AMS
❒ Incompatible Applications: Reduce & Shift in Image Shift

The figure shown below is the sample image using the Vertical/Horizontal zoom mode.

Length: 0.50, Width: 0.50 Length: 0.50, Width: 1.00 Length: 0.50, Width: 2.00 Length: 0.50, Width: 4.00

Width
Length

Length: 1.00, Width: 0.50 Length: 1.00, Width: 1.00 Length: 1.00, Width: 2.00 Length: 1.00, Width: 4.00

Length: 2.00, Width: 0.50 Length:2.00, Width: 1.00 Length:2.00, Width: 2.00 Length: 2.00, Width: 4.00

Length: 4.00, Width: 0.50 Length: 4.00, Width: 1.00 Length: 4.00, Width: 2.00 Length: 4.00, Width: 4.00

Basic Operations 6-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Lens Mode (continued)

Vertical/Horizontal Zoom (continued)

Basic Screen

Vertical
zoom key

1 Touch ZOOM to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio.
2 Touch the Vertical zoom key ( ) to select a vertical ratio.
3 Use keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired reduction or enlargement ratio
in 3 digits; or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio.
NOTE: If an incorrect ratio is entered, continue by entering the correct 3-digit ratio.
4 Touch the Horizontal zoom key ( ) to select a horizontal ratio.
5 Use keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired reduction or enlargement ratio
in 3 digits; or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio.
6 When the desired ratios are specified, touch OK to complete the setting. The popup
menu disappears automatically.
To cancel the setting, touch ZOOM again, enter the desired ratios, then touch OK.

6-14 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Copy Size

The tray selection keys below SIZE are used to select a specific paper tray. When a
specific tray is selected, the APS key will be deselected and the AMS key will be
highlighted. The copy size may require a ratio adjustment. When using the RADF with
Initial settings, a ratio will be selected automatically.

Selecting Copy Size


Tray locations correspond to trays 1, 2, 3, 4 and Multi-sheet bypass tray. Paper types,
such as RECYCL, COLOR, LTRHD, SPCL., LABELS, INVOIC, LEGAL, may be
specified on some trays by the key operator for information only.

❒ When a selected tray is empty, an out-of-paper icon ( ) will flash on the tray key, along with a
message to load paper in the empty tray.

Basic Screen

1 Touch the desired tray key to highlight it.


2 APS will be deselected, and the AMS key (-A-) will be highlighted on the Basic
Screen.
To restore the APS mode, touch APS. The AMS key (-A-) will be deselected, and
APS will be highlighted.

NOTE: See p. 6-9 for details in AMS function.

Basic Operations 6-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Copy Size (continued)

Selecting Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray

Basic Screen

1 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray, and load the copy paper on the tray. See p. 12-6
for further details.
When loading copy paper on the Multi-sheet bypass tray , the Bypass key will
change the (!) indicator to the (Bypa), and the empty icon ( ) on the Bypass key
will be go off.
2 Touch the Bypass key to highlight it.
APS will be deselected, and the AMS key (-A-) will be highlighted on the Basic
Screen.
NOTE: See p. 6-9 for details in AMS function.

6-16 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Reserve

Set Reserve Job


The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current (scan/print) job is in
process. When the current job is finished, the Reserve job starts printing immediately.
The RESERVE key on the screen is touch sensitive and active only when another job is
in progress; otherwise it appears grayed out.

❒ Job settings: Max. 5 (current job plus 4 reserve jobs)


❒ The reserve job is available to be set after the copier starts to scan the current job. When
setting more than one reserve job, the next reserve job setting will be available after the copier
starts to scan for the previous reserve job.
When the current job is under Store mode, Image Insert, or Book Copy, the reserve job setting
will be available after the copier starts to print the current job.
❒ If certain conditions occur while a reserve job is being set, such as activation of Interrupt
mode, mishandled paper, or running out of paper, the current output job will cease and the
SETTING indicator on the screen will be replaced by INTERRUPT, JAM or ADD PAPER, as
appropriate. Perform the required measure for the situation at hand.
❒ The order of the reserve jobs can be altered on the Job List Screen.
❒ The reserve jobs can be deleted on the Job List Screen.
❒ Incompatible: Interrupt copying, Scanning in Store mode, Proof Copy

Basic Screen: reserve job available Reserve Job Setting Screen

Basic Operations 6-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Reserve (continued)

Set Reserve Job (continued)


The RESERVE key may be used to set the reserve job only when another job is in
progress; otherwise the key appears grayed out. Set the reserve job as shown below.

1 Touch RESERVE to display the Reserve Job Setting Screen.


2 Set the desired copying conditions for the reserve job.
When the Reserve Job Setting Screen is displayed, all keys on the LCD and control
panel will function for the reserve job.
NOTE: When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job, the SETTING key changes to JAM or ADD PAPER
key on the Basic Screen. See p. 6-19 to p. 6-20.
3 Position original(s) FACE UP in the RADF or FACE DOWN on the platen glass after
completing to scan for the current job. The message “Ready to copy” will be
displayed on the Basic Screen.
4 Press [START]. The original for the reserve job will be scanned.
NOTE: When the message “Please load size ** paper in any tray except tray #” is displayed, load the
specified paper into the tray.
5 When the scanning for the reserve job is completed, the Basic Screen for the current
printing job will be restored.
6 Repeat step 2 to 4 to reserve more than one job.
7 Copying on the reserve job will start automatically after completing the current job.

6-18 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Reserve (continued)

Mishandled Paper During Reserve Setting


If a misfeed occurs with the job in progress while you are setting a reserve job, the
SETTING indicator on the screen will change to JAM.

Basic Screen

If originals in the reserve job are already scanned when the misfeed occurs, the reserve
job will be performed after the jam is cleared and the cleared job is completed.

1 Touch JAM to display the Jam Position Screen.


2 To view Help Screen instructions, touch GUIDE and remove paper/original.
3 The JAM will change to SETTING when cleared job is completed.
4 Press [START]. The output job will be reprocessed.
5 Touch RESERVE to continue setting the reserve job.

If scanning is not completed when the misfeed occurs, but reserve settings were already
made, the reserve job can be performed after the cleared job is completed.
Simply insert the original document and press [START].

Basic Operations 6-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Reserve (continued)

When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress


If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a
reserve job, the SETTING indicator on the screen will change to ADD PAPER (blinking).
In this case, you can still continue the reserve job setting.

Basic Screen

1 Touch ADD PAPER to display the Basic Screen for the print job.
2 Confirm the empty tray and add paper.
3 Press [START]. The ADD PAPER will change to SETTING and the print job will be
reprocessed.
4 Touch RESERVE to continue setting the reserve job.

6-20 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Job List Screen

Touch the JOB LIST key on the Basic Screen to display the Job List Screen (see below).
The Job List Screen allows you to perform the following functions.
• Confirm machine status
• Change order of reserve job
• Delete reserve job
To return to the Basic Screen, touch OK on the Job List Screen.

Basic Screen Job List Screen

To change the order of reserve job


1 Touch the lower/upper arrow key to highlight the desired reserve job.
2 Touch ADVANCE. The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order
unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress.
3 To return to the Basic Screen, touch OK on the Job List Screen.

To delete reserve job


1 Touch the lower/upper arrow key to highlight the desired reserve job.
2 Touch DELETE. The Job Clear Confirmation Screen will be displayed.
3 Touch YES. The highlighted reserve job is cleared.
3 To return to the Basic Screen, touch OK on the Job List Screen.

Basic Operations 6-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Reserve (continued)

Job List Screen (continued)


Contents of Job List Screen
JOB NO. : Displays the No. (001-999) for each job assigned to the machine.
MODE: Displays the machine’s current mode of operation. Four modes are
listed below.
COPIER
PRINTER
SCANNER
STATUS: Displays the current status of the machine for each job.
[Indication] [Meaning]
ERROR : Error in each mode
PRINTING : Printing in each mode
NO PAPER : No paper in copy/print mode
STOP : Stop in each mode
JAM : Jam in each mode
SCANNING : Scanning original(s) in copy mode
WAITING : Waiting to be output
NOTICE : Notice message displayed
TOTAL PAGE(s): Displays the number of scanned pages for each job. (0 to 999)
PAGE(s) LEFT: Displays the remaining copy count of the job.
0 to 999
Copy count = No. of scanned pages x Print quantity
MINUTE(s) TO GO: Displays the time (in minutes) required for completing the job.
Shorter than 1 minute: <1
2 ~ 999
NOTE: The time displayed is an approximation and may take slightly longer.

6-22 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Store Mode

Store mode allows you to scan multiple originals by touching the SCAN key on the Basic
Screen after setting copying conditions, and then output the complete set by pressing
[START].

Platen Store Mode


Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the document feeder due
to thickness, size or condition.
When scanning thick originals that require keeping the document cover open, select
Non-image area erase to prevent exposure of the glass area around the border of the
original. This feature ensures a clean copy result and reduces toner consumption. The
Non-image area erase mode automatically releases after the original for which it is
selected is scanned. Additional images may be scanned.

❒ Incompatible : Image Insert

Control Panel Application Selection Screen

SCAN

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8

1 Make required copying selections, and select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode.
2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen, then touch Store Mode to highlight it.
You may find the key already highlighted due to the copying selections made.
3 Touch OK to complete the application settings and return to the Basic Screen.
4 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [C] (CLEAR QTY.), then enter the correct quantity.

Basic Operations 6-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Store Mode (continued)

Platen Store Mode (continued)


Basic Screen

5 Open the document feeder.


6 Place original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the document feeder.
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION.
NOTES:
• For details on positioning original, see p. 4-2.
• For original and copy paper information, see Section 4.
• When Book copy, Non-image area erase, Auto detection mode of Repeat, or AUTO layout is selected,
keep the document feeder open throughout the procedure so that the selected function can operate
properly.
7 Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan and store the data into memory.
8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all originals are scanned.
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the
remaining memory.
NOTES:
• See p. 13-4 to p. 13-7 if memory overflow occurs.
• To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/CLEAR].
9 Press [START] to print. All the data in memory will be output.

6-24 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Store Mode (continued)

RADF Store Mode


Use this feature to scan more than 50 originals into memory from the RADF. Use this
function in conjunction with the Reserve function to increase efficiency of the copying
job.

❒ Incompatible : Image Insert, Book Copy

Basic Screen

1 Make required copying selections, and select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode.
2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen, then touch Store Mode to highlight it.
You may find the key already highlighted due to the copying selections made.
3 Touch OK to complete the application settings and return to the Basic Screen.
4 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
To change the print quantity, press [C] (CLEAR QTY.), then enter the correct quantity.
5 Place original FACE UP in the document feeder.
NOTES:
• For details on positioning original, see p. 4-4.
• For original and copy paper information, see Section 4.
6 Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan and store the data into memory.
7 Repeat steps 5 to 6 until all originals are scanned.
Memory indicator on the upper right of the Basic Screen allows you to check the
remaining memory.
NOTES:
• See p. 13-4 to p. 13-7 if memory overflow occurs.
• To delete the scanned data without printing, press [STOP/CLEAR].
8 Press [START] to print. All the data in memory will be output.

Basic Operations 6-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Rotation

This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original size documents
onto size 8.5"x11" or 5.5"x8.5", irrespective of the copy paper loading direction.
By default, Rotation requires APS or AMS to function; however, the key operator may
set this function ON, OFF, to operate when APS, AMS or reduce functions, or to operate
when APS functions. See p. 11-46 to p. 11-50.
❒ Rotation copying uses memory.
❒ Copy size: 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5" (landscape type loading ( ) only)
❒ Original size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5", 5.5"x8.5"R
❒ Incompatible: Book Copy, Repeat, AUTO layout, Non-image area erase

Rotation and APS


In APS, the copier automatically copies onto the same paper size as the original(s) in 1:1.
For example, when size 8.5"x11" copy paper is loaded in the tray in landscape
orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in portrait orientation,
Rotation and APS function together to rotate the original image by 90° and output the
8.5"x11" copy to match the orientation of the copy paper.

Original Copy paper Rotation and APS

APS cannot be
used alone.

Similarly, when size 8.5"x11" copy paper is loaded in the tray in portrait orientation and
the copier detects that the original is placed in landscape orientation, Rotation and APS
function together to rotate the original image by 90° and output the 8.5"x11" copy to
match the orientation of the copy paper.

Original Copy paper Rotation and APS

APS cannot be
used alone.

6-26 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Rotation (continued)

Rotation and AMS


For example, when size 8.5"x11" copy paper is loaded in the tray in landscape
orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in portrait orientation,
Rotation (if required) rotates the original image by 90° and the copy is made with the
appropriate AMS ratio to fit the portrait style of the copy paper.

Original Copy paper Rotation and AMS AMS only

Similarly, when size 8.5"x11" copy paper is loaded in the tray in portrait orientation and
the copier detects that the original is placed in landscape orientation, Rotation (if
required) rotates the original image by 90° and the copy is made with the appropriate
AMS ratio to fit the landscape style of the copy paper.

Original Copy paper

Rotation and AMS AMS only

Basic Operations 6-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Rotation (continued)

When the 5.5"x8.5" tray is selected and the copier detects that the original is placed in
portrait orientation, Rotation rotates the original image by 90° and the copy is made with
the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the portrait style of the copy paper.

Original Copy paper Rotation and AMS AMS only

To Release Automatic Rotation


The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically.

To release automatic Rotation:


Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen, then touch AUTO to deselect it.
The Rotation icon on the Basic Screen will disappear to indicate that the Rotation
function is canceled.

To resume automatic Rotation:


Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen, then touch AUTO to highlight it.
The Rotation icon will be displayed to indicate that the Rotation function is
reactivated.

Output Mode Screen (machine without Finisher) Output Mode Screen (machine with Finisher)

6-28 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Check Mode and Proof Copy

Use the Check mode to confirm copying selections before pressing the [START] key.
In this mode, use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before copying
multiple copies. This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the
following copying selections.
• Copying conditions using Store mode • Booklet
• Sheet/Cover insertion • Image Insert
• Chapter • Book Copy
• Combination

With Proof copy, all originals are scanned into memory, and only one set is output after
you press [PROOF COPY] key on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY key on the
Check Screen. After Proof copy, the “✽” mark will be displayed in the Check Screen. You
may change only the selections with the “✽” mark indicated on the left.
When [START] is pressed, the job resumes copying until the job is completed.

❒ All settings made can be viewed in the Check Mode Screen.


❒ Proof copy is available when using RADF, or Platen store mode for multiple originals.
❒ Proof copy cannot be used for testing the Userset density.
❒ Proof copy can be performed as needed, until the print quantity amount reaches zero.
❒ Proof copy is unavailable with Group and Reserve mode.

Check Screen Check Screen (after proof copying)

Basic Operations 6-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Check Mode and Proof Copy (continued)

Control panel

SCAN

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

1 Set the desired copying conditions.


2 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass. Scan originals, if required.
3 Press [CHECK] on the control panel to display the Check Screen.
4 Verify the settings made for the current job.
5 If necessary, press [PROOF COPY] on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY on the
Check Screen to output a set as a sample copy.
If only one copied set is needed and the sample set is adequate, press [STOP/
CLEAR] to delete the stored data.
6 Touch EXIT (or press [CHECK]) to exit from the Check mode and return to the Basic
Screen.
7 If settings are OK, press [START].
Otherwise, change the settings as desired, restore the Check Screen to return to the
checking steps, or to the Basic Screen to start copying.
If print quantity is set for two or more, the copier will output that amount minus the
sample set(s).

6-30 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Interrupt Mode

Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job. When
interrupt copying is completed, the settings for the initial job restore automatically and
the Basic Screen displays. The [INTERRUPT] key can be used when the copier is
performing the following operations:
• Continuously printing the image stored in memory
• Scanning the originals into memory
• Scanning the originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode
• In PRINT mode
The Interrupt mode cannot be selected with the following copier conditions:
• The Basic Screen is not displayed.
• The Call for Sevice message displayes or a paper misfeed occurs.
❒ Incompatible: Reserve
Control Panel Basic Screen

DATA

RINT COPY

INTERRUPT POW
3 O

6 PROOF COPY

9 STOP / CLEA

1 To stop the current copying job, press [INTERRUPT]. For particular jobs in progress,
copying will cease only after certain phases of the immediate operation are
completed, as indicated by LED conditions described below.
• Collectively printing image stored in memory
The [INTERRUPT] LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed. Then the
LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode.
• Scanning originals into memory
The [INTERRUPT] LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in
the document feeder. Then, the LED remains steady for the temporary job
performed in Interrupt mode.
• Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode (see note 1)
The [INTERRUPT] LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job,
scans all originals placed in the document feeder, and prints one set of the reserve
job. The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode.
2 The SETTING indicator on the Basic Screen will change to INTERRUPT.
Basic Operations 6-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Interrupt Mode (continued)

3 Remove any document from the platen glass or from the document feeder, if
present.
4 Place new original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the document
feeder.
5 The copying settings in Interrupt mode are as follows.
Copy Mode : 1-1
RADF : ON
AES : ON
Lens Mode : 1.00 (100%)
APS : ON
Print Quantity : 1
Finisher : OFF*
Output mode for machine without Finisher : Sort
*: The copier with Finisher will output copies on the Finisher lower tray.

Select other copying features that are compatible with the Interrupt mode, if desired.
6 Press [START].
7 When Interrupt copying is completed, press [INTERRUPT] again to return to the
settings of the initial job.
8 Replace the initial original, then press [START] to resume copying.

NOTE:
1 In Reserve mode, pressing [INTERRUPT] before the copier finishes scanning the reserve job originals
clears the settings selected for the reserve job.
2 When [CHECK] is pressed during Interrupt Copying, the information displayed reflects the initial copy job
settings. Check mode will not display Interrupt copy job information.

6-32 Basic Operations

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Basic Operations
Help Mode

Use the [HELP] key to access information about the current screen mode and to learn
about setting procedures. The [HELP] key can be pressed from any screen except Job
Memory and Key Operator Screens.

The Help Mode Screen also includes the Help menu icon in the lower left of the Help
Screen. When touched, the Help Menu Screen displays a list of all of the copier
functions. When a function item is touched, the Help Screen displays information specific
to that topic.

The Key-Ope mode key is also provided in the lower left corner of the Help Screen.
When touched, the Key Operator Password Entry Screen wll be displayed to access the
Key operator mode. See p. 11-2.

Control Panel Help Screen Help Menu Screen

CHECK HELP

APPLICATION

OUTPUT

JOB MEMORY

1 While in any screen, press [HELP] to display the Help Screen.


2 Touch Toner, TRAYs, BYPASS, RADF, Staple, or the Service call icon to display
specific Help information.
3 For help on operations, touch HELP MENU in the lower left area of the screen. The
Help Menu Screen will be displayed. Select one of the 5 Help menu items.
4 Touch EXIT to return to the screen that was displayed before pressing [HELP].

Basic Operations 6-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 7: Output Modes

Finisher Specifications
Non-Sort Mode
Sort Mode
Group Mode
Staple-Sort Mode
Face Up Mode
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher
Normal Exit
Rotation Exit
Face Up Exit

Output Modes 7-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Finisher Specifications

Use only paper that is recommended by Konica. Be sure to store paper according to the
Recommended Operating Environment stated in Specifications.
Note: Special stock is not guaranteed for reliability or copy quality.

This section describes five output modes for copying with the Finisher installed. For the
copier without Finisher, refer to p. 7-14 ~ p. 7-19

Finisher Type
❒ FS-109 - 3 Exit Trays: 1 fixing tray (upper tray) and 2 moving trays (middle & lower trays) with
2 built-in staplers

Non-Sort Mode
❒ Paper size: 11"x17" ~ 5.5"x8.5"R
❒ Paper weight: 16~32 lb; Special stock (transparency film, labels, hole punch, rag content)
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Finisher upper tray
100 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4)
10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.)
Finisher middle/lower tray
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)

Sort Mode
❒ Paper size: 11"x17"~5.5"x8.5"R
❒ Paper weight: 16~32 lb
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Paper exits to the middle/lower tray only.
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)

Group Mode
❒ Paper size: 11"x17"~5.5"x8.5"
❒ Paper weight: 16~32 lb
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Paper exits to the middle/lower tray only.
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)

7-2 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Finisher Specifications (continued)

Staple-Sort Mode
❒ Paper size: 11"x17"~5.5"x8.5"R (1 staple only on 5.5"x8.5"R)
❒ Paper weight: 16~24 lb
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Paper exits to the middle/lower tray only.
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)
❒ Staple capacity: 50 sheets*1 in normal paper mode (5.0mm thick or less)
20 sheets*2 in thick paper mode
❒ Staple position: See p.7-11
NOTES:
*1: Staple sheet capacity in normal mode is changeable, and may be set to 45, 40 or 35 by service.
*2: Staple sheet capacity in thick paper mode is changeable, and may be set to 25, 15 or 10 by service.

Face Up Mode
❒ Paper size: 11"x17" ~ 5.5"x8.5"R
❒ Paper weight: 16~32 lb
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Paper exits to the upper tray only.
100 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4)
10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.)

Paper Exit Switching Function of Finisher Tray


When the amount of copies delivered to any Finisher tray exceeds the limit, the copier
automatically shifts the output to another tray to complete the output job.
Finisher upper tray:
After 100 sheets (irrespective of the paper size) delivery, the output shifts to the
middle, then lower tray.
Finisher middle tray:
After 300 sheets (11"x17" or 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)/700 sheets (8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11",
A4R, A4) delivery, the output shifts to the lower tray.
Finisher lower tray:
After 300 sheets (11"x17" or 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)/700 sheets (8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11",
A4R, A4) delivery, the output shifts to the middle tray.
The 7045 copier defaults to this Paper Exit Switching function. If you desire to release
this function, contact your service representative.

NOTE:
When the print quantity selected exceeds the finisher capacity, the copier automatically stops printing
before the number of discharged copies exceeds the capacity. Remove the copies from the tray, then press
[START] to complete the job.

Output Modes 7-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Non-Sort Mode

The Non-sort mode simply means that the offset-stacker finisher modes are not
selected. Copies will be stacked on the Finisher upper/middle/lower tray without being
offset by sets.

❒ Paper size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4


(5.5"x8.5" is available in the horizontal feeding direction ( ) only)
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Finisher upper tray
100 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4)
10 sheets (thin/thick paper, transparency film, etc.)
Finisher middle/lower tray
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)

6
5
4
3
2
1

Control panel Output Mode Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

7-4 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Non-Sort Mode (continued)

1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.


2 Touch TRAY1, TRAY2 or TRAY3.
To use the Non-sort mode, be sure the SORT, STAPLE, GROUP, and Face Up TRAY1
are not highlighted.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
4 Select additional copying features, as desired.
5 Enter the desired print quantity.
6 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
7 Press [START] to begin copying in Non-sort mode.
Copies will exit face down, with the page heading toward the front of the copier.
NOTES:
1. When the print quantity selected exceeds the finisher capacity, the copier automatically stops printing
before the number of discharged copies exceeds the capacity. Remove the copies from the tray, then press
[START] to complete the job.
2. When the Finisher is disconnected from the copier before printing, the message “Please connect finisher to
the copier” will be displayed, and if it happens to be disconnected in the middle of printing, the Jam Position
Screen will be displayed. Be sure to lock the Finisher securely to the copier to avoid the above cases.

Output Modes 7-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Sort Mode

The Sort mode is available when the offset-stacker finisher is installed. Use this mode
when you want to output multiple copies of the original set, and have each set offset on
the Finisher middle/lower tray. The staple mode can be selected with the sort mode.
Each copied set will offset in the stack tray.
❒ Paper size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4
(5.5"x8.5" is available in the horizontal feeding direction ( ) only)
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Paper exits to the middle/lower tray only.
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)
❒ Incompatible: Using platen glass (Platen memory copy can use platen glass), Group,
Transparency Interleaving mode of Special Paper

3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
30mm

Control panel Output Mode Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

7-6 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Sort Mode (continued)

1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.


2 Touch TRAY2 or TRAY3.
NOTE: When using the sort mode do not touch TRAY1.
3 Touch SORT.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 Select additional copying features, as desired.
6 Enter the desired print quantity.
7 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. 50 originals can be set.
When using RADF memory copy, position originals FACE UP in the document
feeder and touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan.
When using Platen memory copy, position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass
and touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan.
8 Press [START] .
NOTES:
1. When the print quantity selected exceeds the finisher capacity, the copier automatically stops printing
before the number of discharged copies exceeds the capacity. Remove the copies from the tray, then press
[START] to complete the job.
2 When the Finisher is disconnected from the copier before printing, the message “Please connect finisher to
the copier” will be displayed, and if it happens to be disconnected in the middle of printing, the Jam Position
Screen will be displayed. Be sure to lock the Finisher securely to the copier to avoid the above cases.

CAUTION
To avoid injury when the Finisher middle tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the
two portions of the closing area.

Output Modes 7-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Group Mode

The Group mode is available when the offset-stacker finisher is installed. Use this mode
when you want to group together multiple copies of each original, and offset the sets on
the Finisher middle/lower tray. Grouped sets cannot be stapled.

❒ Paper size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4


(5.5"x8.5" is available in the horizontal feeding direction ( ) only)
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Paper exits to the middle/lower tray only.
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)
❒ Incompatible: Sort, Staple-Sort, Proof Copy, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet,
Transparency Interleaving and Thin/Thick Paper modes in Special Paper, Image Insert,
Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase

4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
30mm

Control panel Output Mode Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

7-8 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Group Mode (continued)

1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.


2 Touch TRAY2 or TRAY3.
NOTE: When using the group mode do not touch TRAY1.
3 Touch GROUP.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.
5 Select additional copying features, as desired.
6 Enter the desired print quantity.
7 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
8 Press [START] .
NOTES:
1. When the print quantity selected exceeds the finisher capacity, the copier automatically stops printing
before the number of discharged copies exceeds the capacity. Remove the copies from the tray, then press
[START] to complete the job.
2 When the Finisher is disconnected from the copier before printing, the message “Please connect finisher to
the copier” will be displayed, and if it happens to be disconnected in the middle of printing, the Jam Position
Screen will be displayed. Be sure to lock the Finisher securely to the copier to avoid the above cases.

CAUTION
To avoid injury when the Finisher middle tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the
two portions of the closing area.

Output Modes 7-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Staple-Sort Mode

The Staple-sort mode is available when the offset-stacker finisher is installed. Use this
mode when you want to offset and staple each copied set.
Each finished set will be offset on the Finisher middle/lower tray from the next copied
set.
❒ Paper size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R (1 staple only), A4R, A4
❒ Paper capacity for 20 lb: Paper exits to the middle/lower tray only.
500 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)
❒ Staple capacity: 50 sheets 20 lb (5.0mm thick or less)
(Staple capacity is changeable, and may be set to 45, 40, or 35 by service.)
20 sheets 32 lb in thick paper mode
(Staple capacity is changeable, and may be set to 25, 15, or 10 by service.)
❒ Staple location: 1 parallel staple
8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R, A4R, A4
1 oblique staple
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", A4R, A4
2 parallel staples
11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4
❒ Incompatible: Using platen glass (Platen memory copy can use platen glass), Group,
Transparency Interleaving and Thick Paper in Special Paper, APS mode in Mixed original,
Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase

3 3 3
2 2 2
3 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
3 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1

1 oblique staple 1 parallel staple 2 parallel staples

7-10 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Staple-Sort Mode (continued)
Control panel Output Mode Screen Staple Location Selection Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

Output Modes 7-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Staple-Sort Mode (continued)

1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.


2 Touch STAPLE SET. The Staple Location Selection Screen will be displayed.
3 Touch the desired key among the eight keys on the Staple Location Selection
Screen to select the staple location. See the previous page for reference.
4 Touch OK on the Staple Location Selection Screen to return to the Output Mode
Screen. The STAPLE and SORT modes are highlighted.
5 Touch TRAY2 or TRAY3.
NOTE: When using the staple-sort mode do not touch TRAY1.

6 Touch OK on the Output Mode Screen to complete the setting and return to the
Basic Screen.
7 Select additional copying features, as desired.
8 Enter the desired print quantity.
9 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. 50 originals can be set.
When using Platen memory copy, position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass
and touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan.
NOTE: Do not scan more than 51 images.

10 Press [START] .
NOTES:
1 When the print quantity selected exceeds the finisher capacity, the copier automatically stops printing
before the number of discharged copies exceeds the capacity. Remove the copies from the tray, then press
[START] to complete the job.
2 When the Finisher is disconnected from the copier before printing, the message “Please connect finisher to
the copier” will be displayed, and if it happens to be disconnected in the middle of printing, the Jam Position
Screen will be displayed. Be sure to lock the Finisher securely to the copier to avoid the above cases.
3 When the number of original(s) is one or exceeds 50, the Staple-sort mode will be ineffective.

CAUTION
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of the paper exit
lever, otherwise you may be injured.

CAUTION
To avoid injury when the Finisher middle tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT your hand into the
two portions of the closing area.

7-12 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Face Up Mode

In the normal exit mode, i.e., without Face Up mode selected, copies exit to the exit tray
in the same order as the originals. In the simplex mode, for example, every sheet exits
face down, and in the duplex mode, odd numbered sides exit face down. When the
speedier Face Up mode is selected, copies exit to the upper tray of the Finisher in the
reverse order, with simplex sheets and odd numbered duplex sheets face up.

❒ The Finisher upper tray only can be used.


❒ Face up mode cannot be selected together with Sort or Staple.
❒ When using platen glass in simplex copying, place the originals in reverse order to get
effective results.
❒ Incompatible: Staple-Sort
❒ Using Multi-sheet bypass tray automatically sets the copier to be in Face up mode. If you
desire to release this setting, contact your service representative.

Control panel Output Mode Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.


2 Touch TRAY1 and Face UP TRAY1.
In this case, the copied sets will be sorted automatically. Touch GROUP to output in
Group mode.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.

Output Modes 7-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher

This section describes output modes for a copier without the Finisher. For the copier with
Finisher installed, refer to p. 7-2 ~ p. 7-13.

❒ Normal exit with Sort (default) or Group


❒ Rotation exit (Rotation+Sort or Rotation+Group)
❒ Face up exit

Normal Exit

Sort with normal exit (default) Group with normal exit


Example: Example:
3 set copies 3 set copies

2 3
1 Originals

7-14 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

Rotation Exit
Rotation+Sort exit Rotation+Group exit
Example: Example:
3 set copies 3 set copies
(8.5"x11") (8.5"x11")

2 3
1 Originals

Face Up Exit

2 3
1 Originals

Rotation+Sort exit Rotation+Group exit Sort with Group with


normal exit normal exit
Example: Example: Example: Example:
3 sets copies 3 sets copies 3 sets copies 3 sets copies
(8.5"x11") (8.5"x11")

Output Modes 7-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

Normal Exit
When rotation exit is not required, you can use the normal mode with Sort or Group.
Sort mode: The original set will be copied in amounts determined by the Print
Quantity setting. Sorted sets will not be offset from each other.
Group mode: Each original page will be copied in amounts determined by the Print
Quantity setting. The grouped sets will not be offset from each other.

Control panel Output Mode Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.


2 When selecting Sort mode, be sure to deselect all the output mode keys.
When selecting Group mode, touch GROUP to highlight it.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.

7-16 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

Rotation Exit
In this mode, every other finished set rotates 90 (degrees) upon exit provided 8.5"x11"
paper and 8.5"x11"R are separately loaded in trays.
Rotation+Sort exit: The original set will be copied in amounts determined by the
Print Quantity setting. Sorted sets will be offset from each
other.
Rotation+Group exit: Each original page will be copied in amounts determined by
the Print Quantity setting. The grouped sets will be offset
from each other.
❒ Not available for the copier with Finisher installed
❒ 8.5"x11" and 8.5"x11"R paper should be loaded in any tray including Multi-sheet bypass tray.
❒ Use RADF, or operate Memory copy.
❒ Available only Rotation+Group exit when not using Platen memory copy but setting originals
onto the platen glass.
❒ Incompatible: APS, Sheet/Cover Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving and Thin/Thick
Paper modes in Special Original, Mixed Original, Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area
Erase

Control panel Output Mode Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

1 Load 8.5"x11" and 8.5"x11"R copy paper in any tray or Multi-sheet bypass tray.
2 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.
3 Touch Rotation+Sort or Rotation+Group, as required.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.

Output Modes 7-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

Rotation Exit (continued)


6 Select additional copying features, as desired.
7 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. Up to 50 originals can be set.
When using Platen memory copy, position originals FACE DOWN on the platen
glass and touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan.
When using RADF memory copy, position originals FACE UP in the document
feeder and touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT on the
Check Screen to return to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
9 Slide the exit tray longer.
10 Press [START].
NOTE: When the number of copies delivered to the exit tray reaches 100, the copier automatically stops
outputting the job. If you want to release this function, contact your service representative.

7-18 Output Modes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Output Modes
Output Mode for Machine without Finisher (continued)

Face Up Exit
When copying without Face Up exit selected, all simplex copies and odd numbered
duplex copies exit to the tray face down. When Face Up exit is selected, this is reversed
so that simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies exit face up. While this mode
reduces the amount of paper movement, you will need to arrange the pages in correct
order, manually.
❒ Face up exit can be selected together with Sort, Group, or Rotation exit modes.
❒ When using the platen glass with simplex (1-1) copying, start copying from the last page first
and continue in that reverse order to output the set in correct order.
❒ Incompatible: None
❒ When using the Multi-sheet bypass tray, the Face Up mode is automatically selected. To
release this setting, contact your service representative.

Control panel Output Mode Screen

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8
JOB MEMORY

1 Press [OUTPUT] to display the Output Mode Screen.


2 Touch FACE UP, and another output mode key if desired.
3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen.

Output Modes 7-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications Section 8: Applications

Application Function Menu

Sheet/Cover Insertion

Chapter

Combination

Booklet

Special Paper
Transparency Interleaving
Thin/Thick Paper

Image Insert

Book Copy

Special Original
Mixed Original
Folded Original
Non-Standard Size
Upside Down

Text/Photo Enhance

Reverse Image

Repeat

Frame/Fold Erasure

AUTO Layout

Image Shift

Non-Image Area Erase

Stamp/Overlay

Applications 8-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Application Function Menu

When the [APPLICATION] key is pressed, the Application Selection Screen displays on
the touch panel. If one function on the menu is incompatible with another, it will appear
dimmed.
When a function is touched, it becomes highlighted. If you touch OK key when a function
is highlighted, another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the appropriate
settings. For example, if you select Sheet/Cover Insertion from the Application Selection
Screen and select the type of insertion mode you want, another screen will display that
allows you to enter the page locations.
When all settings are made for each function, the OK key can be touched to complete
the settings and return you to the Application Selection Screen. If no other Applications
are desired, the OK key can be touched again to complete the selections and restore the
Basic Screen. With the Basic Screen displayed, you can press the [START] key to
perform the operation.
Touch Store Mode to select the Store mode.
To restore the original copying conditions, touch CANCEL.
To clear all Application settings, touch ALL CLEAR.

Control Panel Application Selection Screen

SCAN

CHECK HELP

1 2
APPLICATION

4 5
OUTPUT

7 8

NOTES:
• The indicator light on the [APPLICATION] key will be lit when application selections have been made.
• When incompatible selections are made, the last key pressed will be selected.
• To cancel individual functions in application mode, touch the highlighted key.
To cancel all application selections, touch ALL CLEAR on the Application Selection Screen.
• To view the detailed selections currently made, press [CHECK] to display the Check Screen. See p. 6-29
to p. 6-30.

8-2 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion

Use Sheet/Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert into the finished set
chapter or separator sheets, as well as front and back covers. Sheet insertion from tray
1* may be used in conjunction with Front/Back cover insertion from tray 1* or the Multi-
sheet bypass tray. If using the thick paper for front/back cover, select the Multi-sheet
bypass tray for Front Cover insertion. All other trays will be used for regular copied
sheets.
NOTE: *The source of insertions and covers can be shifted from tray 1 to tray 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass
tray by key operator. See p. 11-46 ~ p. 11-50.

Specifications for Sheet/Cover Insertion


❒ Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively.
NOTE: Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recomended that you contact your Konica service
representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Use RADF store mode when the original count exceeds 50.
Use Platen store mode when originals are not suitable for use with the RADF.
See p. 6-23 to p. 6-25 for details of the Store mode.
❒ Max. insert sheets: 15 locations, from 1 ~ 999, including front and back covers.
❒ AMS is automatically selected. The copy size in insertion tray and original size are sensed,
and the correct ratio will be automatically selected.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Group
❒ Incompatible Applications: Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving and
Thin/Thick Paper modes in Special Paper, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed
Original, Non-Standard Size), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP (PAGE,
NUMBERING)/OVERLAY

Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen

Applications 8-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)

Insertion Mode
This mode is classified as Copy insertion and Blank insertion. The Copy insertion mode
copies and inserts plain or colored sheets from tray 1* at locations designated on the
Page Setting Screen. The Blank insertion mode inserts non copied (plain or colored)
sheets.

Front Cover Mode


This mode is classified as Front copy and Front blank. The Front copy mode copies and
inserts a plain or colored sheet from tray 1* or the Multi-sheet bypass tray into the
finished set, as a Front cover. The Front blank mode inserts a non copied (plain or
colored) sheet.
Thick paper mode can be used in conjunction with the Front cover mode when feeding
thick paper from the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
When either Front copy or Front blank is selected, the corresponding icon will appear on
the upper-left corner key on the Page Setting Screen. The tray source will be the same
as that for back cover, and can be selected and displayed on the Sheet/Cover Insertion
Screen.

Back Cover Mode


This mode is classified as Back copy and Back blank. The Back copy mode copies and
inserts a plain or colored sheet from tray 1* or the Multi-sheet bypass tray into the
finished set, as a Back cover. The Back blank mode inserts a non copied (plain or
colored) sheet.
Thick paper mode can be used in conjunction with the Back cover mode when feeding
thick paper from the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
When either Back copy or Back blank is selected, the corresponding icon will appear on
the lower-right corner key on the Page Setting Screen. The tray source will be the same
as that for front cover, and can be selected and displayed on the Sheet/Cover Insertion
Screen.

The insertion type can be selected separately for front cover, back cover, and insertion
sheets. This allows multiple combinations, such as copied front cover with blank insert
sheets and blank back cover.

NOTE: *The source of insertions and covers can be shifted from tray 1 to tray 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass
tray by key operator. See p. 11-46 ~ p. 11-50.

8-4 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)

Basic Functions Combination samples


9 10 9 10
78 9 10 78 9
56 78 56 7 8 10
34 56 34 56
12 2 34 1 2
23
4
SURVEYOR’S SURVEYOR’S
REPORT REPORT
SURVEYOR’S 1 SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT REPORT

Originals Copies Originals Copies


FRONT COVER COPIED FRONT & BACK COVERS COPIED
9 10 9 10
78 9 10 78 9 10
56 78 56 78
34 56 34 56
1 2 34 1 2 34
SURVEYOR’S 12 SURVEYOR’S 12
SURVEYOR’S SURVEYOR’S
REPORT REPORT REPORT REPORT

Originals Copies Originals Copies


FRONT COVER BLANK FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK
10
89 9
67 7 8 10
3 45 56
12 34
SURVEYOR’S 12
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT REPORT
9 10
78 89
56
34 56 10
12 23 7
SURVEYOR’S 4
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
Originals Copies
BACK COVER COPIED
9 10
78 9 10
34
56
56
78 Originals Copies
1 2 34
SURVEYOR’S 12
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT REPORT FRONT & BACK COVERS COPIED,
AND COPY SHEET INSERTION

9 10 9 10
Originals Copies 78 78
56 6
34 45
BACK COVER BLANK SURVEYOR’S 1 2
23
SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT REPORT
9 10 10
78 89
56
34 56
12 23 7
SURVEYOR’S SURVEYOR’S 1 4
REPORT REPORT

Originals Copies
FRONT & BACK COVERS BLANK,
Originals Copies AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION
COPY SHEET INSERTION
9 10
78
9 10
78 Many more combined functions
56 6
34 45
SURVEYOR’S 12
12
3 are available, e.g., copied front
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT REPORT cover with blank insert sheets
and blank back cover.

Originals Copies
BLANK SHEET INSERTION

Applications 8-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)

Application Selection Screen Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen

Page Setting Screen

Max. insertion locations: 15


1 Load insert/cover sheets into tray 1*, and load regular sheets of the same size into
copy paper tray source. If thick covers are required, load thick paper (up to 32 lb)
into the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen.
3 Touch Sheet/Cover Insertion to display the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen.
4 Select the tray from which the front/back cover is fed.
Touch TRAY1* for feeding from tray 1, or BYPASS for feeding from the Multi-sheet
bypass tray.
To insert thick paper for cover, touch THICK PAPER. BYPASS will automatically be
selected.

NOTE: *The source of insertions and covers can be shifted from tray 1 to tray 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass
tray by key operator. See p. 11-46 ~ p. 11-50.

8-6 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Sheet/Cover Insertion (continued)

6 Select Front Cover Insertion, if desired.


Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover, or FRONT BLANK to insert a blank
front cover.
Proceed to step 7 to select Back Cover Insertion, if desired.
Proceed to step 8 to select Sheet Insertion, if desired.
7 Select Back Cover Insertion.
Touch BACK COPY to insert a copied back cover or touch BACK BLANK to insert a
blank back cover.
Return to step 6 to select Front Cover Insertion, if desired.
Proceed to step 8 to select Sheet Insertion, if desired.
8 Select Sheet Insertion.
Touch COPY INSERTION to insert copied sheets or touch BLANK INSERTION to insert
blank sheets.
Return to step 6 to select Front Cover Insertion, if desired.
Return to step 7 to select Back Cover Insertion, if desired.
Touch OK to display the Page Setting Screen.
9 Fifteen keys are displayed on the screen to designate each insertion location.
The first (upper left) key displays the Front cover icon if selected. The Back cover
icon appears, if selected, as the last (lower right) key.
Touch to highlight a blank key, then use the control panel keypad to enter the page
number of insertion location.
Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key.
Example: If p. 4 is entered in blank mode, a blank sheet will be inserted between p. 4
and p. 5; in copy mode, a copied sheet is inserted at p. 4.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE or press [C] (CLEAR Q’TY). The insertion
location will be deleted.
When all page numbers are entered, touch OK to return to the Sheet/Cover Insertion
Screen.
10 Touch OK to restore the Application Selection Screen.
Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
11 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
12 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. 50 originals can be set at a
time.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
13 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Chapter

Chapter is used with RADF in 1-2 or 2-2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on
the right side, rather than the reverse side, of a duplex copy.
To effectively locate the title page on the right, a blank sheet will be automatically
created on the reverse side of a sheet, if required.
❒ Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively.
NOTE: Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recomended that you contact your Konica service
representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Use RADF store mode when the original count exceeds 50.
Use Platen store mode when originals are not suitable for use with the RADF.
See p. 6-23 to p. 6-25 for details of the Store mode.
❒ Max. title pages: 15 sheets, from 1 ~ 999
❒ Copy mode: 1-2 or 2-2 mode only
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: 1-1, 2-1
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Group
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Transparency Interleaving and
Thin/Thick Paper modes in Special Paper, Image Insert, Book Copy, Repeat, AUTO Layout,
Non-Image Area Erase, OVERLAY

1-sided originals Copies in Chapter mode 2-sided originals


Tilte page Title pages
7

8
5

6
3

8
7 8
2

6 7
5
34 4 5
1 2 6 2 3
1 1
Title pages Title page

8-8 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Chapter (continued)

Application Selection Screen Chapter Page Setting Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Chapter. The Chapter Page Setting Screen will be displayed. The 1-2 copy
mode is automatically selected.
3 Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each title page.
4 Touch SET.
To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE or press [C] (CLEAR Q’TY). The insertion
location will be deleted.
5 Repeat this for each title page number you want to be located on the right hand side.
Be sure to touch SET after each page number entry, up to a total of 15 entries.
Option: Touch Booklet on the Chapter Page Setting Screen to use this function. To change the selection of
paper tray for copying title pages, touch COPY INSERTION on the screen.
6 When all entries are made, touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
7 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
9 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. 50 originals can be set at a
time.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
10 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.
NOTES:
• Entering the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen.
• Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered out of sequence.
• When a page number is larger than the total original page count, insertion occurs as the last page of the
document.

Applications 8-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Combination

Use this function to layout and copy two, four or eight pages onto one sheet of copy
paper, using the 2 in 1, 4 in 1 or 8 in 1 mode, respectively.

❒ Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively.
NOTE: Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recomended that you contact your Konica service
representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Use RADF store mode when the original count exceeds 50.
Use Platen store mode when originals are not suitable for use with the RADF.
See p. 6-23 to p. 6-25 for details of the Store mode.
❒ AMS is automatically selected. The copy size in tray 1 and original size are sensed, and the
correct ratio will be automatically selected. (Tray source can be changed manually.)
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Image Insert, Book Copy,
Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat, Frame/Fold
Erasure, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, OVERLAY

Layout Horizontal order Vertical order


Original
2 in 1 4 in 1 8 in 1 2 in 1 4 in 1 8 in 1
Portrait type
1 2 1 3
1 2 3 4 1 3 5 7
1 2 1 2
5 6 7 8 2 4 6 8
3 4 2 4

Landscape type 1 2 1 5
1 1
1 2 3 4 1 3 2 6
3 4 5 6 2 4 3 7
2 2
7 8 4 8

8-10 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Combination (continued)

Application Selection Screen Combination Mode Selection Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Combination to display the Combination Mode Selection Screen.
3 Touch 2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1, then select one of the keys in the LAYOUT area to
describe your layout requirements after referring to the illustration on the previous
page.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 AMS is automatically selected, and tray 1 is selected. When selecting any other tray,
touch the desired tray key.
7 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
8 Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. 50 originals can be set at a
time.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
9 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Booklet

Use the Booklet with trays 1, 2, 3, or 4, or the Multi-sheet bypass tray to make a multiple
page signature booklet on both sides of ledger, legal, 8.5"x11"R, or 5.5"x8.5"R paper.
Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged in booklet format
in correct order.

❒ Scan and store originals into memory, then print all the pages collectively.
NOTE: Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recomended that you contact your Konica service
representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Use RADF. Use RADF store mode when the original count exceeds 50.
Use Platen store mode when originals are not suitable for use with the RADF.
See p. 6-23 to p. 6-25 for details of the Store mode.
❒ Original pages should be a multiple of 4; otherwise blank pages are automatically inserted to
the last.
❒ Output order can be selected on the screen.
❒ AMS is automatically selected. Select the desired copy paper.
❒ Copy mode: 1-2 or 2-2 mode only
❒ Original size: 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5" (16 lb ~ 32 lb)
❒ Copy size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"R, 5.5"x8.5" (20 lb bond
recommended)
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: 1-1, 2-1, APS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Staple, Group
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Transparency Interleaving and
Thin/Thick Paper modes in Special Paper, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard
Size, Upside Down), Repeat, Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP
(PAGE, NUMBERING)/OVERLAY

1-sided originals ..............

1 2 3 4 47 48

Booklet copying ..............


24
47

45

25
2

48 1 46 3 26 23

1 3 5 7 45 47

2-sided originals ..............


46

48
2

8-12 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Booklet (continued)

Application Selection Screen Booklet Mode Selection Screen

1 Load 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", or 5.5"x8.5"R copy paper in a tray.


2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen.
3 Touch Booklet to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen.
4 Touch to highlight the desired mode key, then touch OK to return to the Application
Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Select the 1-2 or 2-2 copy mode.
7 AMS is selected automatically.
Select the tray in which you load copy paper in step 1.
To release AMS, select the desired magnification, then select copy size.
8 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
9 Position originals in the document feeder FACE UP and in portrait orientation ( ).
Up to 50 originals can be set at a time.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
10 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Paper

Use the following two modes of the Special Paper function to obtain the optimum
copying result according to the copy paper type.
• Transparency Interleaving mode
• Thin/Thick Paper mode

Transparency Interleaving
Use the Transparency function in 1-2 or 2-1 mode to copy onto overhead projection
transparencies, and output a blank or copied interleaf sheet with each copied
transparency.
In the Blank Sheet Interleaving mode, a blank interleaf sheet is output with each
transparency to keep the film material from sticking together.
In the Copy Sheet Interleaving mode, a copied interleaf sheet is output along with each
transparency copy to provide reference during a presentation as well as providing the
means for making additional photocopies for filing and distribution.
❒ Transparency source: Multi-sheet bypass tray
❒ Print quantity: 1
❒ Multi-sheet bypass tray capacity: 1 transparency sheet
❒ AMS is automatically selected.
❒ Copy mode: 1-1 or 2-1 only
❒ Machine with Finisher discharges transparency by Non-sort only.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: 1-2, 2-2, APS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Sort, Staple, Group
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Thin/Thick Paper mode in
Special Paper, Image Insert, Special Original (Mixed Original), Repeat

Blank sheets Copied sheets


Transparency films Transparency films

Original
Blank Sheet Interleaving Copy Sheet Interleaving

8-14 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Paper (continued)

Transparency Interleaving (continued)

Application Selection Screen Special Paper Mode Selection Screen

1 Load copy paper in tray 1, 2, 3, or 4 to match the size of transparencies.


2 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Insert one transparency at a time into the Multi-
sheet bypass tray, and adjust the paper guides.
IMPORTANT: Do not load transparencies into any other tray.
3 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen.
4 Touch Special Paper to display the Special Paper Mode Selection Screen.
5 Touch Blank Sheet Interleaving or Copy Sheet Interleaving, unless it is already
highlighted.
6 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
7 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 Print quantity is already set to 1, and no higher quantity may be selected.
9 AMS is selected automatically.
Select the tray in which you load copy paper in step 1.
To release AMS, select the desired magnification.
10 Place original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
11 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Paper (continued)

Thin/Thick Paper
Use this function to select the appropriate mode when copy paper is thin or thick.
❒ Thin copy paper weight: 16 lb ~ 19 lb
Thick copy paper weight: 24 lb ~ 32 lb
❒ Thin/Thick paper source: Multi-sheet bypass tray (single feed mode)
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: 1-2, 2-2, APS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Sort, Group, Staple-Sort, Rotation exit
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving
in Special Paper
Application Selection Screen Special Paper Mode Selection Screen

1 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Insert one sheet of thin or thick paper into the tray,
then adjust the paper guides.
2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen.
4 Touch Special Paper to display the Special Paper Mode Selection Screen.
5 Touch THIN PAPER or THICK PAPER, as required.
6 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
7 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 Print quantity is already set to 1, and no higher quantity may be selected.
9 Place original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
11 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

8-16 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Image Insert

Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass (such as,
photos, paste-ups, newspaper articles, graphs, etc.) with images scanned from the
document feeder. Then, output the combined images as a finished set.
The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the
document feeder.

❒ Store mode is automatically selected. See p. 6-23 to p. 6-25 for details.


First, scan originals using RADF store mode, and then scan insertion originals using Platen
store mode.
NOTE: Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recomended that you contact your Konica service
representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Max. image insert: 15 locations, from 1 ~ 999
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Group
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Transparency
Interleaving mode in Special Paper, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-
Standard Size), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase, OVERLAY

Place originals 7 8
6
7 8 5
onto RADF 6
45 34
23 2
1 1
Insertion originals
8
6
8
6

5
4

7
2

Place originals 7
onto RADF 5 4
3
1 1

Applications 8-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Image Insert (continued)

Application Selection Screen Image Insert Page Setting Screen

1 Review the pages to be scanned from the document feeder, and note the page
number locations for inserting images scanned from the platen glass.
To insert more than one sheet at the same location, enter the page number repeatedly.
For example, if insertion locations are [2/2/6], scanned platen images will be inserted
as follows:
The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2.
The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first scanned
Image insertion.
The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6.
2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen.
3 Touch Image Insert to display the Image Insertion Page Setting Screen.
4 Use the keypad on the Control panel to enter the page numbers for up to 15
insertion locations, touching SET after each entry.
• When a page number is larger than the total original count, a sheet is inserted as
the last page.
• Entering the same page number twice will insert two sheets at that location.
• Insertions occur in sequence, even if page numbers are entered out of sequence.
• To clear an incorrect entry, touch DELETE or [C] (CLEAR QTY.), then enter the
correct page number.
Option: Touch Booklet on the Image Insertion Page Setting Screen to use this function.
5 When all page number entries are made, touch OK.
The Application Selection Screen will be displayed.
6 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.

8-18 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Image Insert (continued)

7 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
8 Scan the document feeder images.
(1) Position originals FACE UP in the document feeder. 50 originals can be set at a
time.
(2) Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to scan originals.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) for all originals.
9 Scan the platen glass images.
(1) Open the document feeder.
(2) Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass, then close the document
feeder.
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS ACCORDING TO
PAGINATION.
(3) Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to begin scanning.
(4) Remove the original, and for each original.
Be sure to touch SCAN on the Basic Screen for each original.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make a Proof copy if desired; then touch EXIT to return to
the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
10 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Book Copy

The Book Copy mode performs image division on the original image. Use Book Copy,
for example, to copy an open book or 11”x17”/ 8.5”x11”R onto two 8.5"x11"/ 5.5"x8.5"R
sheets in 1-1 or 2-1 mode, or onto the front and back sides of one 8.5"x11"/ 5.5"x8.5"R
sheet in 1-2 or 2-2 mode.
The following three modes can be selected from the Book Copy Screen.
1 Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the first scan.
2 Front Cover + Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the second scan after the
first scan copies normally.
3 Front/Back + Full Scan mode: Image division starts from the third scan after the first
and second scan copy normally.

❒ Store mode is automatically selected. See p. 6-23 to p. 6-25 for details.


Use Platen store mode for scanning front and back covers.
NOTE: Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recomended that you contact your Konica service
representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Original paper: 11"x17", 8.5"x11"R, 5.5"x8.5"R
NOTE: Originals are not limited in size, however, carefully select an appropriate magnification ratio and
setting orientation when copying original sizes other than the sizes mentioned above.
❒ Copy paper: 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"R (use Rotation) (20 lb recommended)
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Image Insert, Special
Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat, Image
Shift, STAMP/OVERLAY

Application Selection Screen Book Copy Screen

8-20 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Book Copy (continued)

1 Load an even number of 8.5"x11" or 5.5"x8.5"R sheets in a tray or in the Multi-sheet


bypass tray.
2 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen.
3 Touch Book Copy to enter the Book Copy Screen.
4 Touch either key in the OUTPUT section to select the scanning order according to
the original, and touch full scan, front cover + full scan, or front/back + full scan, as
required.
Option: Touch Booklet on the Book Copy Screen to use this function.
5 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the Application Selection Screen.
6 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Select the desired copy mode, magnification, and copy size.
NOTE: When selecting full scan and using platen glass, select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode.
8 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
9 Position the open book or sheet on the platen glass in the left rear corner, aligning
the edge with the left measuring guide. To output the set in the same order as the
originals, start scanning from the first page.

“Front Cover + Full Scan”


9 10
78
4 56
23
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT Scan from SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
first page

Copies
“Front/Back + Full Scan” 78
9 10
4 56
23
SURVEYOR’S SURVEYOR’S
REPORT REPORT Scan from SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT
first page

Copies

Applications 8-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Book Copy (continued)

9 10
“Front Cover + Full Scan” 4 56
78
23

SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT

Copies

9 10
“Front/Back + Full Scan” 4 56
78
23

SURVEYOR’S SURVEYOR’S 1
REPORT REPORT

Copies

If full scan is selected and the originals can be loaded in the document feeder, RADF
store mode is also available. If desired, position originals in the document feeder.
10 Touch SCAN on the Basic Screen to start scanning.
IMPORTANT: When scanning from the platen glass, Non-image area erase and
AUTO layout are automatically selected. DO NOT close the RADF when touching
SCAN, otherwise those functions may not operate.
11 Remove the first original(s). Repeat the procedure for subsequent originals, touching
SCAN for each original.
When front cover + full scan or front/back + full scan is selected, only the front
and back covers are required to be scanned from the platen glass. If you want to use
the RADF store mode for scanning the rest of the originals, close the document
feeder and position originals, then touch SCAN. (See the illustration above.)
NOTE: Memory overflow may occur during scanning. See p. 13-4 to p. 13-7.
12 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

8-22 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Original

Use the following four modes of the Special Original function to obtain the optimum
copying result according to the original type.
• Mixed Original mode
• Folded Original mode
• Non-standard Size mode
• Upside Down (1-2 Upside down/ 2-1 Upside down) mode

Mixed Original
Use the Mixed original mode with the document feeder or with the Store mode to copy
ledger (11"x17"), legal (8.5"x14"), letter (8.5"x11") and 5.5"x8.5"*, or legal (8.5"x14"),
letter/R (8.5"x11"R and 8.5"x11") and 5.5"x8.5"* originals. Each original in the mixed set
will be copied to paper of the same size (APS mode) or to paper of desired size with
appropriate ratio automatically selected (AMS mode).
❒ Use RADF. Up to 50 sheets can be set at a time.
❒ Original paper: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11" and 5.5"x8.5"* mixed (16 lb ~ 32 lb)
8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" and 5.5"x8.5"* mixed (16 lb ~ 32 lb)
* 5.5"x8.5" original is available in portrait type feeding only.
❒ APS, which is automatically in effect, can be switched to AMS when copy size is selected.
❒ Rotation can be used with AMS.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using platen glass
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Combination, Booklet, Transparency
Interleaving and Thin/Thick Paper modes in Special Paper, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special
Original (Folded Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat, Fold Erasure, AUTO
Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP/OVERLAY

APS mode
Automatically
select the paper
of the same size
as that of the
original.

AMS mode
Automatically select
magnification ratio
Mixed size originals to copy onto the
same paper in size.

Applications 8-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Original (continued)

Mixed Original (continued)

Application Selection Screen Special Original Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch Mixed Original.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Select APS mode to copy each original size to a matching copy size in 1:1 mode; or
select AMS mode to copy all originals to the same paper size, with a ratio selected
automatically.
APS is automatically selected.
To select AMS, touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired copy
size.
7 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
8 Position mixed originals FACE UP in the document feeder; 11"x17", 8.5"x14",
8.5"x11" and 5.5"x8.5" mixed, or 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11" and 5.5"x8.5" mixed.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
9 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

8-24 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Original (continued)

Folded Original
Use the Folded original mode with the document feeder to copy folded originals.
Otherwise, the size detection sensor of the RADF may function incorrectly.
This mode requires more scanning time to detect the original size.

❒ Use RADF. Up to 50 sheets can be set at a time.


❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using platen glass
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size),
AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase

Folded original

Application Selection Screen Special Original Screen

Applications 8-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Original (continued)

Folded Original (continued)


1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection
Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch Folded Original.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
7 Position folded original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.
NOTE: Normal originals can also be loaded at the same time.
8 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

8-26 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Original (continued)

Non-Standard Size
Feeding Special size originals through the RADF without selecting the Non-Standard
Size mode may cause the copier to stop scanning and mistakenly sense that the size
detection sensor has malfunctioned or even cause a paper misfeed.
Using Non-standard Size mode, the copier will search and copy onto the standard size
copy paper that is closest to the original size.

❒ Use RADF. Platen glass is not available.


❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: APS, AMS, Store mode
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Combination, Booklet, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original
(Mixed Original, Folded Original, Upside Down), Repeat, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout,
Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP/OVERLAY
Application Selection Screen Special Original Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch Non-standard Size.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
7 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.
8 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Original (continued)

Upside Down
1-2 Upside Down arranges the even pages of the simplex originals upside down on the
reverse side of duplex copies.
Similarly, 2-1 Upside Down rearranges the reverse sides of duplex originals which read
upside down to make normal simplex copies.
❒ 1-2 Upside Down functions only when 1-2 copy mode is selected.
❒ 2-1 Upside Down functions only when 2-1 copy mode is selected and RADF is used.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions
1-2 Upside Down: 1-1, 2-2, 2-1
2-1 Upside Down: 1-1, 1-2, 2-2
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving and Thin/Thick
Paper in Special Paper (1-2 Upside Down only), Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original,
Non-Standard Size), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase, OVERLAY

1-2 Upside Down 2-1 Upside Down


3

3
1

1
2

2
3
2
1 Left/Right bound duplex originals
Simplex originals
1 3
2
3

3
1

2
3 1
2

Left/Right bound duplex copies Top/Bottom bound duplex originals

1 3
2

2
3 1
3
2
Top/Bottom bound duplex copies 1
Simplex copies

8-28 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Special Original (continued)

Upside Down (continued)


Application Selection Screen Special Original Screen

1-2 Upside Down Screen 2-1 Upside Down Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch 1-2 Upside down or 2-1 Upside down, as desired. The subsequent screen for
selecting binding type will be displayed.
4 Touch to select the binding type of copies/originals, then touch OK to return to the
Special Original Screen.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen.
6 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
8 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder.
9 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.
Applications 8-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Text/Photo Enhance

Use this function to enhance the reproducibility of half tones so that the copy quality
more closely matches that of the original.

Photo Mode
Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half-tone photo image. The copy will closely
represent the half-tones of the original image.
Text Mode
Use the Text mode when copying the text original. In this mode, text is improved in
comparison to using the general mode.
Increase Contrast Mode
Select Increase Contrast to darken lightly printed images (e.g., pencil) without changing
background exposure. In cases where the image is light and background is dark, the
background will not be changed.

❒ Incompatibles: None

Original Standard Photo mode

Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation


Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Original Standard Increase contrast
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation mode
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation
Konica Corporation Konica Corporation Konica Corporation

Original Standard Text mode

NOTE: The key operator can set the copier to shift each of nine density levels into two levels of lighter and
three levels of darker for each of the four modes, i.e., Text/Photo (general), Text, Photo, and Increase
Contrast. See p. 11-54.

8-30 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Text/Photo Enhance (continued)

Application Selection Screen Text/Photo Enhance Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Text/Photo Enhance to enter the Text/Photo Enhance Screen.
3 Touch TEXT, PHOTO, or INCREASE CONTRAST, as required.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Enter the desire print quantity from the control panel keypad.
7 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
8 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Reverse Image

Use Reverse image to reverse the image from black-on-white to white-on-black, and
vice versa.

❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: None


❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase

Application Selection Screen

Original Reverse Image copying

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Reverse Image. The incompatible function keys will be dimmed to show
inactivity.
3 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to complete the setting and
return to the Basic Screen.
4 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
5 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
6 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

8-32 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Repeat

Use Repeat to create labels, business cards, tickets, etc., by repeating the selected
image down the page.
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode
Repeat the selected image area of 10mm ~ 150mm in both vertical and horizontal widths
measured from the rear right corner of the 11"x17" original area indicated on the right
edge of the platen glass.
Auto Detection mode
Selecting this mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the original
placed onto the platen glass by activating Non-image area erase.
Repeat mode
Select the repeating times of the original to be arranged in one copy sheet.

Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode Auto Detection mode

Vertical
width
Horizontal width

Original
Original Copy Copy (AUTO)

Repeat mode

Copy (2 Repeat)

Copy (2 Repeat)

Copy (2 Repeat)

Applications 8-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Repeat (continued)

❒ Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Mode Specifications


Use the platen glass. (Document feeder cannot be used.)
Repeat width: 10~150mm (in 1mm increments)
Copy mode: 1-1 mode only (When selecting 1-2 mode, Platen store mode will function
automatically.)
❒ Auto Detection Mode Specifications
Use the platen glass. Non-image Area Erase will function automatically.
Scanning area: 11"x17" ~ 10mm x 10mm
Repeat image area: Original image area detected by Non-image Area Erase
Copy mode: 1-1 mode only (When selecting 1-2 mode, Platen store mode will function
automatically.)
❒ Repeat Mode Specifications
Magnification ratio: 1.00 (100 %)
Scanning area: 11"x17" ~ 10mm x 10mm
Repeat image area: A portion of the selected copy size equally divided according to the mode
(RepeatX2, RepeatX4, or RepeatX8) designated on the screen. If the detected image size is
larger than the size determined in the above explanation, the copy result may be unsatisfactory.
❒ Incompatible Conditions with Vertical /Horizontal Width Setting Mode
Basic copying conditions: Using RADF, 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS
Output modes: Sort, Staple, Group
Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving
mode in Special Paper, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded
Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Image Shift,
Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP/OVERLAY
❒ Incompatible Conditions with Auto Detection Mode
Basic copying conditions: Using RADF, 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS
Output modes: Sort, Staple, Group
Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving
mode in Special Paper, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded
Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Reverse Image, Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO
Layout, Image Shift, STAMP/OVERLAY
❒ Incompatible Conditions with Repeat Mode
Basic copying conditions: 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS, Change magnification
Output modes: Sort, Staple, Group
Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving
mode in Special Paper, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded
Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Frame/Fold Erasure, AUTO Layout, Image Shift,
STAMP/OVERLAY
NOTE: The Auto Detection mode of the Repeat image function may not operate properly if the lighting in the
work place is directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an
appropriate place for installation.
8-34 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Repeat Image (continued)

Application Selection Screen Repeat Mode Selection Screen

Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Screen Repeat Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Repeat to enter the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.
3 To select the Vertical/Horizontal width setting mode:
(1) Touch Verti./Horiz. The Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting Screen will be
displayed.
(2) Specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area using up/down
arrow key, from 10~150 mm in 1 mm increments. Keep touching the key to
increase/decrease the value continuously.
Touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.

Applications 8-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Repeat Image (continued)

To select the Auto detection mode, touch AUTO. Non-image area erase will function
automatically.
To select the Repeat mode:
(1) Touch Repeat. The Repeat Screen will be displayed.
(2) Touch 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat, as desired.
Touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.
4 Touch OK on the Repeat Mode Selection Screen to return to the Application
Selection Screen.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
APS and AMS are automatically released, and 1.00 (100%) is selected as a
magnification ratio.
6 Select the desired magnification ratio and copy size.
NOTE: When 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat is selected, the scanning area will be a portion of the selected
copy size equally divided according to the selected mode. In this case, magnification ratio will be fixed
to 1.00 (100%).
7 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
8 Position the original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
When selecting 2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat, position original(s) FACE UP in the
document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER WHEN AUTO IS
SELECTED IN STEP 3.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
9 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

8-36 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Frame/Fold Erasure

Use Frame/Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders.

❒ Frame erasure amount: 1~15 mm in 1 mm increments


❒ Fold erasure amount: 1~30 mm in 1 mm increments
❒ Incompatible with Frame erasure: Combination, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-
Standard Size), Repeat
❒ Incompatible with Fold erasure: Combination, Booklet, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed
Original, Non-Standard Size), Repeat

Frame
erasure

Frame
Frame
erasure Fold
erasure General copying
erasure

Frame Erasure Fold Erasure Frame/Fold Erasure


copying copying copying

Application Selection Screen Frame/Fold Erasure Setting Screen

Applications 8-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Frame/Fold Erasure (continued)

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Frame/Fold Erasure to display the Frame/Fold Erasure Setting Screen.
3 Touch Frame Erasure, then use arrows to select the desired frame erasure amount,
from 1~15 mm in 1 mm increments.
Touch Fold Erasure, then use arrows to select the desired fold erasure amount, from
1~30 mm in 1 mm increments.
Touch Frame Erasure and Fold Erasure to use both modes.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting. The Application Selection Screen will be restored.
5 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
7 Position original(s) FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
8 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

8-38 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
AUTO Layout

Use this function to detect the image area of the original on the platen glass and center
the whole image on the copy paper.
❒ Use platen glass. (RADF cannot be used.)
❒ Copy mode is automatically set to 1-1 mode; 1-2 mode is also available only when using
Platen store mode.
❒ APS and AMS are automatically released. Changing Magnification is available.
❒ Non-image area erase is automatically selected (can be released manually).
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF, 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Staple
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert,
Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Reverse
Image, Repeat, Image Shift, STAMP/OVERLAY
NOTE: The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the
platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate place for
installation. Application Selection Screen

Set original

AUTO layout copying

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch AUTO Layout.
3 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
4 APS and AMS are automatically released. Select the desired copy size and
magnification.
5 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
6 Position original FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT FEEDER. PLACING ORIGINAL
OBLIQUELY ON THE PLATEN GLASS MAY CAUSE BLACK COPY MARKS.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
7 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.
Applications 8-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Image Shift

Use Image Shift to create a new binding margin on originals. If image loss is likely,
select the Reduce & Shift mode instead of regular Image Shift.
❒ RADF store mode is available. When selecting 1-2 mode and using platen glass to scan,
Platen store mode is automatically selected. See p. 6-23 to p. 6-25 for details.
NOTE: Should memory overflow occur frequently, it is recomended that you contact your Konica service
representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine.
❒ Shift amount in Image Shift mode: –250 ~ +250mm in 1mm increments
❒ Shift amount in Reduce & Shift mode: –250 ~ +250mm in 1mm increments
❒ Reduction ratio varies according to the shift amount in Reduce & Shift mode.
❒ Incompatible with Image Shift mode
Basic copying conditions: None
Output modes: None
Applications: Booklet, Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-
Standard Size, Upside Down), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP/
OVERLAY
❒ Incompatible with Reduce & Shift mode
Basic copying conditions: APS
Output modes: None
Applications: Image Insert, Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size,
Upside Down), Repeat, AUTO Layout, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP/OVERLAY

1-1 mode 2-1 mode


1
3
4

4
3

4
2 3
2

3
4 2
1

2
1 1
Originals Copies Originals Copies

1-2 mode 2-2 mode


8 1
1 6 3
1

3 4 5
2

2 7
3

2
4

4
2

6
4

Originals Copies Originals Copies

8-40 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Image Shift (continued)
Application Selection Screen Image Shift Setting Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection


Screen.
2 Touch Image Shift to display the Image Shift Setting Screen.
3 Touch Image Shift or Reduce & Shift.
4 If selecting Image Shift mode in step 3, touch the upper or lower arrow key next to
AMOUNT (Front) and AMOUNT (Back) to select the desired shift amount (–250mm
~ +250mm in 1mm increments). The arrow keys next to AMOUNT (Back) functions
only for duplex copying.
NOTES:
1 In Reduce & shift mode, the amount of front and back cannot be selected individually.
2 If double-sided originals already have a binding margin, shift the image of the pages having the right
margin only.
5 If selecting Reduce & Shift mode in step 3, touch the upper or lower arrow key next
to AMOUNT to select the desired shift amount (–250mm ~ +250mm in 1mm
increments).
6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen.
7 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
9 Position original(s) FACE UP in document feeder or FACE DOWN on platen glass.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
10 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.
Applications 8-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Non-Image Area Erase

The Non-image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals, such
as books, magazines, paste-ups, graphs, thin or thin materials, etc. from the platen
glass. The exposed glass area outside the borders of the original will not be copied.
This mode helps to preserve the condition of originals, improves copy quality, and
eliminates unnecessary toner consumption. Keep the document cover open throughout
the procedure.

General copying Non-Image Area Erase

Set original

The Non-image area erase has two modes; namely, Rectangular erase mode and
Oblique erase mode. The copier is initially set to Oblique erase mode. This initial setting
can be changed in Key operator mode. See p. 11-15.

Oblique erase mode Rectangular erase mode

❒ Use the platen glass (RADF cannot be used). Keep RADF open throughout the procedure.
❒ Copy mode: 1-1 mode only (When using Platen store mode, 1-2 mode can be selected.)
❒ Original size: 11"x17" ~ 10mm x 10mm
❒ Image cutoff width: leading end 5mm, trailing end 4mm, top and bottom 2mm.

8-42 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
Non-Image Area Erase (continued)

❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: Using RADF, 2-2, 2-1, APS, AMS
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: Sort, Staple, Group
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Image Insert,
Special Original (Mixed Original, Folded Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Reverse
Image, Image Shift, STAMP/OVERLAY
NOTE: The Non-image area erase function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is
directly over the platen glass. In this case, consult your service representative about an appropriate
place for installation.

Application Selection Screen

1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Non-Image Area Erase.
3 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
4 APS and AMS are automatically released. Select the desired copy size and
magnification.
5 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
6 Position original(s) FACE DOWN on the platen glass.
IMPORTANT: KEEP THE DOCUMENT FEEDER OPEN THROUGHOUT THE
PROCEDURE.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
7 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

Applications 8-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
STAMP/OVERLAY

STAMP allows you to print regular stamp, numbering, page numbering, date and time, ,
and watermark onto output copies. These 5 types of stamps can be used individually or
in multiple combinations.
• WATERMARK prints the letters selected from 4 options over the scanned image,
positioning it in the center of the page.
• STAMP prints the letters selected from 7 options over the scanned image at the
location designated on the screen.
• DATE/TIME prints the date and time in the specified form over the scanned image at
the location designated on the screen.
• PAGE prints the page numbers in the specified form over the scanned image at the
location designated on the screen.
• NUMBERING prints the numbers in the specified form over the scanned image at the
location designated on the screen.

TOP SECRET
L-Top C-Top R-Top STAMP

00.10.10 AM 09:30

DATE/TIME
al
enti
fid
C on 2/5

PAGE

[002 / 005]
WATERMARK L-Bottom C-Bottom R-Bottom
Positions of other stamps NUMBERING

STAMP Specifications
❒ All 5 types of stamps can be used in combination.
❒ A watermark is printed obliquely in the center of the page.
❒ Stamp, Date/Time, Page, and Numbering each can be selected for printing from 6 locations.
❒ Image cutoff width: leading end 5mm, trailing end 4mm, top and bottom 2mm.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: None
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Book Copy, Special Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size),
Repeat, AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase
8-44 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
STAMP/OVERLAY (continued)

Originals scaned Copies in OVERLAY mode


1st scaned original 2nd and later

OVERLAY Specifications
❒ Scan and store originals into memory.
❒ APS and AMS are automatically released.
❒ Magnification is initially set to 1:1. This setting is changeable.
❒ Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions: 2-1, 2-2
❒ Incompatible Output Modes: None
❒ Incompatible Applications: Sheet/Cover Insertion, Chapter, Combination, Booklet, Special
Original (Mixed Original, Non-Standard Size, Upside Down), Image Insert, Book Copy, Repeat,
AUTO Layout, Image Shift, Non-Image Area Erase, STAMP

Applications 8-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
STAMP/OVERLAY (continued)

Application Selection Screen Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen

Original Direction Screen

Watermark Selection Screen Stamp Selection Screen Date/Time Selection Screen

Page Selection Screen Numbering Selection Screen Print Position Selection Screen

8-46 Applications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Applications
STAMP/OVERLAY (continued)

To use STAMP:
1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch STAMP/OVERLAY. The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
3 Touch ORIGI. DIRECT to display the Original Direction Screen.
Touch the key to match the originals to be copied, then touch OK to return to the
Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
4 Touch to select the desired stamp to display the subsequent screen.
On each screen, you can specify the desired type of the selected stamp.
Touch POSITION to display the Print Position Selection Screen, then select the
desired position from 6 location keys on the screen.
Touch Only first page to print the selected stamp on the first page only.
5 Touch OK to return to the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
6 Repeat the step 4 and 5 if more than one stamp is desired.
7 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the Application Selection Screen.
8 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
9 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
10 Position original(s) FACE UP in document feeder or FACE DOWN on platen glass.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view the selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return
to the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
11 Press [START].
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.

To use OVERLAY:
1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch STAMP/OVERLAY. The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
3 Touch Overlay. The Basic Screen will be automatically restored.
4 The Store mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMS are released. Set the
desired Copy mode, Copy density, Lens mode, and Copy size on the Basic Screen.
5 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad.
6 Position the overlaying original in the document feeder or on the platen glass, then
touch SCAN to scan.
7 The second and subsequent pages are to be overlaid in printing. Place them in the
document feeder or on the platen glass, then touch SCAN.
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION.
Option: Press [CHECK] to view selection, and make the Proof copy, if desired; then touch EXIT to return to
the Basic Screen. See p. 6-29 to p. 6-30.
8 Press [START] to print.
After copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the mode and reset the
machine.
Applications 8-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 9 : Job Memory
Job Store

Job Recall

Job Memory Form

Job Memory 9-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Job Memory
Job Store

Use Job Store to store up to 15 frequently-used copying jobs, which can be recalled at any
time. The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names.

❒ All copying functions can be selected


❒ Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory

Job No. Selection Screen Job Store Check Screen

Job No. Selection Screen Job Name Registration Screen

Job No. Selection Screen

9-2 Job Memory

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Job Memory
Job Store (continued)

1 Make job selections from the Basic Screen, Application Selection Screen and/or Output
Selection Screen, then return to the Basic Screen.
2 When all selections are made, press [JOB MEMORY] to display the Job No. Selection
Screen.
3 Touch ENTRY. The Job Store Check Screen displays to enable you to review the
settings. Touching CANCEL on the Job Store Check Screen returns to the Basic
Screen.
(See Sample Job Store Check Screen, previous page.)
4 If settings are correct, touch OK to display the Job No. Selection Screen.
Otherwise, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen, and make new selections.
5 When the Job No. Selection Screen is displayed, touch one of the keys numbered from
1~15 to store the job under that number. Arrow keys can be used to scroll through the
15 job numbers. The selected number key will be highlighted, and touch OK to display
the Job Name Registration Screen.
If you wish to cancel this selection, touch CANCEL to restore the Basic Screen, which
displays the settings for the job. If you wish to cancel the settings, press [AUTO/RESET].
6 Enter a job name in up to 20 characters, using the touch screen alphabet keypad. If
required, scroll with the upper and lower arrows to use lower case and symbol keys.
To correct an entry, touch DEL. repeatedly to delete each character entered, then enter
the correct job name.
If you do not wish to enter a name, touch OK.
The key displays [✽✽✽✽✽] in place of a name.
7 If the Job name is correct, touch OK to resume the Job No. Selection Screen.
To re-enter the Job name, touch CANCEL to return to the Job Name Registration
Screen.
8 When the Job No. Selection Screen is displayed, touch OK to complete the setting and
return to the Basic Screen.

NOTES:
1 A locked job is indicated by a lock icon on the Job key number.
2 Only the key operator can lock a job.
3 A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the key operator.
4 A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key.
5 [✽✽✽✽✽] displayed on a Job number key indicates that a job is stored but unnamed.
6 Job Memory entries can be recorded on the Job Memory Form included at the end of this section.

Job Memory 9-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Job Memory
Job Recall

Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Job Memory.

❒ Interrupt mode cannot be used while in Job Memory

Job No. Selection Screen Job Recall Check Screen

1 Place original(s) as required for the job you are about to recall.
2 Press [JOB MEMORY] to display the Job No. Selection Screen.
3 Touch a Job No. key to select a job you want to recall, and to highlight the key.
If required, scroll with the Upper or Lower arrows to reach the desired Job No. key
(1~15).
To cancel the recall mode, touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen.
4 Touch Job Check. The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the
settings. Touching CANCEL on the Job Recall Check Screen returns to the Job No.
Selection Screen.
5 When the desired Job No. key is highlighted, touch OK to complete the setting, and to
return to the Basic Screen.
To cancel the job, press [AUTO/RESET].
6 Press [START PRINT].

NOTES:
1 A locked job is indicated by a lock icon on the Job key number.
2 Only the key operator can lock a job.
3 A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the key operator.
4 A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key.
5 [✽✽✽✽✽] displayed on a Job number key indicates that a job is stored but unnamed.
6 Job Memory entries can be recorded on the Job Memory Form included at the end of this section.

9-4 Job Memory

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Job Memory
Job Memory Form
Make a copy of this form to record frequently-used copy jobs stored in Job Memory. Update the information
when changes are made. Make additional copies, as needed.

JOB NUMBER/NAME JOB DESCRIPTION

10

11

12

13

14

15

Job Memory 9-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 10: Shortcuts

Reserve Job
Platen Store Mode
RADF Store Mode

Sheet/Cover Insertion
Chapter
Combination
Booklet

Special Paper
Transparency Interleaving
Thin/Thick Paper
Image Insert
Book Copy
Special Original
Mixed Original
Folded Original
Non-Standard Size
Upside Down

Text/Photo Enhance
Reverse Image
Repeat
Frame/Fold Erasure

AUTO Layout
Image Shift
Non-Image Area Erase
Stamp/Overlay
Stamp
Overlay

Loading Paper
Loading Paper in Universal Tray
Loading Paper in LCT (Large Capacity Tray)
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray
Adding Toner

Shortcuts 10-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Reserve Job (see p. 6-17)
1 Touch RESERVE while a current job is in progress to display the reserve job setting
screen.
2 Select the copying conditions for the reserve job.
3 Position the reserve job original(s) face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray or
face down on the platen glass.
4 When using the Platen Memory mode, touch Store Mode to store the image.
If Platen Memory is not selected, press [START] to store the image.
5 When all reserve settings are completed, press [AUTO RESET] to release the reserve
setting mode.
6 Then, touch SETTING to return to the Basic Screen, which displays the current job in
progress.
When copying is completed for the current job, the Basic Screen will display the copy
settings for the reserve job.
7 Press [START]. Copying for the reserve job will start.

Platen Store Mode (see p. 6-23)


1 Make copying selections, then select the 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Store
Mode to highlight the store mode.
3 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
4 In turn and in order of pagination, position each original face down on the platen
glass then close the document feeder (or platen cover).
5 Touch SCAN to scan and store the original image into memory.
6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until all originals are scanned. Be sure to touch SCAN for each
original.
7 When all originals are stored, enter the print quantity amount.
8 Press [START] to begin copying.

RADF Store Mode (see p. 6-25)


1 Make copying selections.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen, then touch Store
Mode to highlight the store mode.
3 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
4 Enter the print quantity amount.
5 Position no more that 50 originals at a time face up on the RADF (document feeder)
tray.
6 Touch SCAN to scan and store the original image into memory.
7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until all originals are scanned.
8 Press [START] to begin copying.
10-2 Shortcuts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Sheet/Cover Insertion (see p. 8-3)
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Sheet/Cover Insertion to display the Sheet/Cover Insertion Screen.
3 Touch TRAY1 or BYPASS to select the tray source for cover stock.
To insert thick paper for cover, touch THICK PAPER. BYPASS will automatically be
selected.
4 Select Front Cover Insertion, then touch FRONT COPY or FRONT BLANK.
5 Select Back Cover Insertion, then touch BACK COPY or BACK BLANK.
6 Select Sheet Insertion, then COPY INSERTION or BLANK INSERTION.
7 Touch OK to display the Page Setting Screen.
8 Touch the 15 blank boxes in turn to designate each insertion location.
9 Touch SET after each entry.
10 When all page numbers are entered, touch OK.
11 Enter the print quantity amount.
12 Position originals face up on the document feeder tray.
13 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the machine.

Chapter (see p. 8-8)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Chapter to display the Chapter Page Setting Screen with 1-2 mode
automatically selected.
3 Use the keypad to enter the page number of the first title page, then touch SET.
4 Repeat Step 3 for each additional title page, touching SET after each entry.
5 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
6 Make additional copying selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Enter the print quantity amount.
8 Position (up to 50) originals face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray.
9 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the machine.

Combination: Copy 2, 4 or 8 originals on 1 sheet (see p. 8-10)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Combination to display the Combination Mode Selection Screen.
3 Touch 2 in 1, 4 in 1, or 8 in 1.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional copying selections.
6 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen with AMS automatically selected. You may
change this setting.
7 When all settings are correct, enter the print quantity amount.
8 Place original(s) face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray.
9 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the machine.
Shortcuts 10-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Booklet (see p. 8-12)
1 First, load 11"x17" or 8.5"x11"R paper in a tray.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
3 Touch Booklet to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen.
4 Touch Output 1 to n or Output n to 1.
5 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
6 Make additional copying selections.
7 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 Select 1-2 or 2-2 copy mode on the Basic Screen.
9 To release AMS, select magnification and copy size.
10 Enter the print quantity amount.
11 Position letter-size originals face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray, in portrait
orientation.
12 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Special Paper: Transparency Interleaving (see p. 8-14)


1 Insert one transparency sheet at a time into the Multi-sheet bypass tray.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
3 Touch Special Paper to display the Special Paper Mode Selection Screen.
4 Touch Blank Sheet Interleaving or Copy Sheet Interleaving unless your choice is
already highlighted.
5 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection screen.
6 Make additional selections.
7 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen with AMS and the required print quantity of
[1] automatically selected.
8 When selecting the Blank Sheet Interleaving or Copy Sheet Interleaving, load the
same size copy paper as the transparencies in any regular tray.
9 Position the original face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray or face down on
the platen glass.
10 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

10-4 Shortcuts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Special Paper: Thin/Thick Paper (see p. 8-16)
1 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray. Insert one sheet of thin or thick paper into the tray,
then adjust the paper guides.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
3 Touch Special Paper to display the Special Paper Mode Selection Screen.
4 Touch THIN PAPER or THICK PAPER, as required.
5 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
6 Make additional application selections, or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Print quantity is already set to 1. Not available to enter any other number.
8 Place original FACE UP in the document feeder or FACE DOWN on the platen
glass.
9 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Image Insert (see p. 8-17)


1 In preparation, note the page No. locations of the images you will be scanning from
the platen glass.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
3 Touch Image Insert to display the Image Insert Page Setting Screen.
4 Enter up to 15 page No. locations, touching SET after each entry.
5 When all page No. locations are entered, touch OK to restore the Application
Selection Screen.
6 Make additional copying selections.
7 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 To start scanning, position the regular originals face up on the document feeder tray,
then touch SCAN.
9 After the originals on the RADF (document feeder) tray are scanned, enter the print
quantity amount for the job.
10 Next, position one original at a time on the platen glass in ascending order of
pagination, i.e., 1~n.
The platen glass originals can be paste ups, graphs, photos, newspaper articles, or
any non-standard document.
11 In turn, touch SCAN to scan each original from the platen glass.
12 Press [START] to combine the non-standard images scanned from the platen glass
with the regular images scanned from the RADF (document feeder). When copying
is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset machine.

Shortcuts 10-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Book Copy (see p. 8-20)
1 First, load an even number of letter sheets into a regular tray.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
3 Touch Book Copy to display the Book Copy Screen with AUTO layout and non-
image area erase selected.
4 Touch full scan, front cover + full scan, or front/back + full scan, as required.
5 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
6 Make additional copying selections.
7 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 Select 1-1 or 1-2 copy mode and the print quantity amount.
9 Position the open book in the left rear corner on the platen glass, starting from the
last page.
10 Align the edges of the book with the left measuring guide plate, then touch SCAN to
begin scanning.
11 Remove the book and copy additional pages as needed, touching SCAN to scan
each page.
12 Press [START] to begin copying. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to
reset the machine.

Special Original: Mixed Original (see p. 8-23)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch Mixed Original.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional copying selections.
6 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Select APS to copy onto various paper sizes to match the original sizes, or select
AMS mode to copy all originals onto one common paper size.
8 Enter the print quantity amount.
9 Position mixed originals face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray.
Combine ledger, legal, letter, and 5.5"x8.5" or legal, letter R, letter, and 5.5"x8.5".
10 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

10-6 Shortcuts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Special Original: Folded Original (see p. 8-25)
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch Folded Original.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional copying selections.
6 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Enter the print quantity amount.
8 Position folded originals face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray.
9 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Special Original: Non-Standard Original (see p. 8-27)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch Non-standard Size.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional copying selections.
6 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Enter the print quantity amount.
8 Position non-standard size originals face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray.
9 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Special Original: Upside Down (see p. 8-28)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Special Original to display the Special Original Screen.
3 Touch 1-2 Upside down or 2-1 Upside down, as desired. The subsequent screen for
selecting binding type will be displayed.
4 Touch Left/Right bind or Top/Bottom bind.
5 Touch OK to return to the Special Original Screen.
6 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
7 Make additional copying selections.
8 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
9 Enter the print quantity amount.
10 Position originals face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray.
11 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Shortcuts 10-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Text/Photo Enhance (see p. 8-30)
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Text/Photo Enhance to display the Text/Photo Enhance Screen.
3 Touch INCREASE CONTRAST, TEXT, or PHOTO.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional copying selections.
6 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Enter the print quantity amount.
8 Position original(s) face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray or face down on the
platen glass.
9 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Reverse Image (see p. 8-32)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Reverse Image to switch from the black-on-white copying mode to white-on-
black copying.
3 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
4 Make additional copying selections.
5 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Enter the print quantity amount.
7 Position original(s) face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray or face down on the
platen glass.
8 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

10-8 Shortcuts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Repeat (see p. 8-33)
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Repeat to display the Repeat Mode Selection Screen.
3 Select the Vertical/Horizontal width setting mode, the AUTO detection mode, or the
Repeat mode.
With the Vertical/Horizontal width setting mode, touch Vert./Horiz., then enter the
vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area.
With the AUTO detection mode, touch AUTO to allow the machine to set equal
repeat areas according to the size of the original with non-image area erase
functioning.
With the Repeat mode, touch Repeat, a portion of the selected copy size equally
divided according to the mode (2 Repeat, 4 Repeat, or 8 Repeat) designated on the
screen.
4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
5 Make additional copying selections.
6 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
7 Enter the print quantity amount.
8 Position original(s) face down on the platen glass.
If you selected the AUTO detection mode, DO NOT CLOSE THE DOCUMENT
COVER.
If you selected the Repeat mode, the RADF (document feeder) can be used.
9 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Frame/Fold Erasure (see p. 8-37)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Frame/Fold Erasure to display the Frame/Fold Erasure Setting Screen.
3 Touch Frame Erasure and enter a value or use the current setting.
4 Touch Fold Erasure and enter a value or use the current setting.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen.
6 Make additional copying selections.
7 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
8 Select copy size and enter the print quantity amount.
9 Position original(s) face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray or face down on the
platen glass.
10 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Shortcuts 10-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
AUTO Layout (see p. 8-39)
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch AUTO Layout to allow the machine to center the original image on the copy
paper.
3 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
4 Make additional copying selections.
5 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Select copy size and enter the print quantity amount.
7 Position original face down on the platen glass without skewing it. DO NOT CLOSE
the document cover.
8 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Image Shift (see p. 8-40)


1 First, select a copy mode (1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2) and a copy size from the Basic Screen.
2 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
3 Touch Image Shift to display the Image Shift Setting Screen.
4 Touch Image Shift (or Reduce & Shift, if image loss is likely).
5 Touch the upper or lower arrow key to enter the amount of front/back margin, from
- 250 ~ + 250 mm.
6 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
7 Make additional copying selections.
8 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
9 Enter the print quantity amount.
10 Position original(s) face up on the RADF (document feeder) tray or face down on the
platen glass.
11 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Non-Image Area Erase (see p. 8-42)


1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch Non-Image Area Erase.
3 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
4 Make additional copying selections.
5 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
6 Enter the print quantity amount.
7 Position original face down on the platen glass, making sure to keep the document
cover open.
8 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.
10-10 Shortcuts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Stamp: Stamp (see p. 8-44)
1 Press [APPLICATION] to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch STAMP/OVERLAY to display the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
3 Touch ORIGI. DIRECT to display the Original Direction Screen. Touch the key to
match the originals to be copied.
4 Touch OK to return to the Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen.
5 Touch the desired stamp to display the subsequent screen.
On each screen, you can specify the desired stamp type (watermark, stamp, date/
time, page, and numbering) of the selected stamp.
Touch POSITION to select printed position.
Touch Only first page to print on the first page only.
6 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen.
7 Make additional copying selections.
8 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen.
9 Enter the print quantity amount.
10 Position original face down on the platen glass, making sure to keep the document
cover open.
11 Press [START]. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Stamp: Overlay (see p. 8-44)


1 Press [APPLICATION] on the control panel to display the Application Selection Screen.
2 Touch STAMP/OVERLAY. The Stamp/Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed.
3 Touch Overlay. The Basic Screen will be automatically restored.
4 The Store mode is automatically selected, and APS and AMS are released. Set the
desired Copy mode, Copy density, Lens mode, and Copy size on the Basic Screen.
5 Enter the desired print quantity amount.
6 Position the overlaying original in the document feeder or on the platen glass, then
touch SCAN to scan.
7 The second and subsequent pages are to be overlaid in printing. Place them in the
document feeder or on the platen glass, then touch SCAN.
IMPORTANT: PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION.
8 Press [START] to print. When copying is completed, press [AUTO RESET] to reset the
machine.

Shortcuts 10-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Loading Paper (see p. 12-3)
Loading Paper in Universal Tray
Universal tray: Tray 1~4 (machine with DB-208)
Tray 1~2 (machine with DB-208A)
Tray 1~2 (machine with DB-608)
1 Withdraw universal tray from the machine.
2 Remove the rear guide plate, and insert it into the position of your desired copy size.
NOTE: Be sure to align and set the rear guide plate to the paper; otherwise the machine may malfunction.
3 Stack paper with curl side up.
4 While pressing the release knob, move the slide guide plate against the paper.
5 Push in the universal tray until it locks into place.
6 When the paper size of the universal tray is changed, the Basic Screen will
automatically change to the Universal Tray Size Selection Screen.
NOTES:
1 The Universal Tray Size Selection Screen cannot be displayed if any screen other than the Basic Screen is
displayed.
2 Pressing AUTO RESET button will restore the Basic Screen without the copy size programmed.

7 Touch the size key.


If the correct size is selected, the Basic Screen will be restored automatically.
If the selected size is incorrect, the machine displays the message “Please select
correct tray size” and will not return to the Basic Screen.

Loading Paper in LCT (Large Capacity Tray)


LCT: Tray 3 (machine with DB-608)
1 Withdraw the LCT from the machine.
2 Stack paper with curl side up.
The bottom of the tray will lower a bit due to the weight of stacked paper.
3 Push in the tray until it locks into place.

Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray


1 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the copier.
When loading 11”x17” or 8.5”x14” paper, pull out the right edge to extend the tray.
2 Insert copy paper while adjusting the paper guides to the paper size.
Insert transparency film one sheet at a time; or, stack paper up to 100 sheets 20 lb
Bond.
3 When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

10-12 Shortcuts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Shortcuts
Adding Toner (see p. 12-7)
CAUTION
Keep toner cartridge away from children. Although the toner is non-toxic, do not inhale it or allow it to
enter your eyes. In case the toner comes in contact with eyes, please consult your physician.

• When toner supply is low, “Please add toner” message displays on the touch screen.
• Before adding toner, read directions on the toner cartridge label.
1 Open the machine front door. Pull the toner unit 90° to the right.
2 Push and release the cartridge lock lever to the right until it stops.
3 Remove the empty toner cartridge.
4 Shake the toner cartridge several times to loosen toner.
5 Remove the toner cartridge cap.
6 Set the new toner cartridge into the toner unit.
NOTE: Align the ▲ mark displayed on the toner cartridge with the ▼ mark displayed on the toner unit.
7 Return and lock the cartridge lock lever to the left until it stops.
The lock tape will be pushed out.
8 Remove the lock tape.
9 Return the toner unit to its original position, then close the machine front door
securely.

Shortcuts 10-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 11 : Key Operator Mode
To the Key Operator
How to Access the Key Operator Mode
Function Menu Map
System Initial [1]
Time [1]
Language [2]
Copier Initial [2]
Copy Mode [1]
Density [2]
Magnification [3]
Tray [4]
Output [5]
Non-Image Erase [6]
Preset Key [3]
Density [1]
Magnification [2]
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4]
How to Access the ECM Setting Mode
Change ECM Data [1]
ECM Data List [2]
All Counter Reset [3]
ECM On/Off Setting [4]
Copy Limit Reached Effect [5]
Lock Job Memory [5]
Paper Type [6]
Panel Contrast [7]
Key Operator Data [8]
Weekly Timer [9]
How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode
Weekly Timer Setting [1]
Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set [2]
Machine Working Day Individual Set [3]
Lunch Hour Off Function [4]
Password Setting [5]
Touch Panel Adjustment [10]
Power Save [11]
Memory Switch [12]
List Print [13]
Application Customize [14]
Density Shift [15]
KRDS Host [16]
Key Operator ECM Form
Key Operator Mode 11-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
To the Key Operator

The key operator is trained to handle all special key operator functions that are not
accessible to the general user, such as monitoring overall copier activity, machine
performance, and service information; modifying machine settings; and controlling user
activity, for billing purposes.
A unique 4-digit key operator password is normally set by service at installation. If the
unique code is not set by service, the copier will not display the Key Operator Password
Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed, and a key operator
password will not be required. A service-set 8-digit ECM master key code must be
entered by the key operator to access the Electronic Copy Monitor functions, and a
service-set 4-digit Weekly timer master key code must be entered by the key operator to
access the Weekly timer functions.
To ensure the security of Key Operator mode, it is recommended that you establish
a unique key operator password, along with the key operator ECM master key code
and Weekly timer master key code, and keep them in a confidential file.
❒ HELP is unavailable in the Key Operator Mode
Help Screen Key Operator Password Entry Screen

Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2

11-2 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
To the Key Operator (continued)

How to Access the Key Operator Mode


1 Press the [HELP] key on the Control panel to display the Help Screen.
2 Touch the Key-Ope mode key on the Help Screen.
The Key Operator Password Entry Screen displays when the 4-digit key operator
password is set by service.
Otherwise, the Key Operator Mode Screen displays without the password
requirement.
3 If the Key Operator Password Entry Screen is displayed, use the keypad on the
touch screen to enter your 4-digit key operator password; then touch OK, to display
the Key Operator Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
If the key operator password is not valid, check with your service representative.
4 To display menus 11. to 16. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the lower
arrow key. To return the menu 1. to 10. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the
upper arrow key.
5 Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen, as described on the
following pages.

NOTES:
• When remote diagnostics is not activated, [16. KRDS host] will be dimmed on the Key Operator
Mode Screen and cannot be selected.
• When the machine is equipped with IP-431 option, a mode selection screen displays after entering
the key operator password. Select “1. System/copier” to enter the System/copier setting mode; or
select “2. Printer/scanner” to enter the Printer/scanner setting mode.

Key Operator Mode 11-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Function Menu Map

FUNCTION MENU SUB FUNCTION MENU AND SETTING OPTIONS

1. System Initial 1. Time: [Current time; Set time]


2. Language: [English; French; Spanish]
2. Copier Initial 1. Copy mode: [RADF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-1; 2-2]
2. Density: [AES; manual]
3. Magnification: [AMS; 1.00; ratio 0.25~4.00]
4. Tray: [APS; Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray]
5. Output: [Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3; Sort, Group, Staple-sort,
Face up tray 1; Staple location; Automatic Rotation
on/off] (machine with Finisher)
[Rotation+sort, Rotation+group, Group, Face up;
Automatic Rotation on/off] (machine without Finisher)
6. Non-Image Erase: [Oblique erase, Rectangular erase; Original
density (Auto/Manual setting)]
3. Preset key 1. Density: [Userset 1, Userset 2 (darker 16 levels, lighter 16
levels)]
2. Magnification: [Userset 1; Userset 2; Userset 3 (ratio 0.25~4.00)]
4. ECM 1. Change ECM data [ID No.; Password; Name; Limit]
2. ECM data list [Data list; Limit]
3. All counter reset [Yes; No]
4. ECM on/off setting [on; off]
5. Copy limit reached effect [Immediately; After job; Warning]
5. Lock Job memory [Job lock/unlock; Delete]
6. Paper type [Recycle; Color; Letterhead; Special; Label; Invoice; Legal; Blank]
7. Panel contrast [Contrast Dark/Normal/Light; Backlight Dark/Normal/Light]
8. Key ope. data [Name; For assistance]
9. Weekly timer 1. Weekly timer setting
2. Weekly timer copier on/off time set
3. Machine working day individual set
4. Lunch hour off function
5. Password setting
10. Touch panel adj

11-4 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Function Menu Map (continued)

FUNCTION MENU SUB FUNCTION MENU AND SETTING OPTIONS

11. Power save Auto low power timer: [5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, 240]
Auto shut off timer: [15, 30, 60, 90, 120, 240]
Auto shut off: [on; off]
12. Memory SW 1. Auto reset timer
2. AUTO/RESET effect
3. Load RADF effect
4. Non image area erase
5. RADF frame erasure
6. Auto tray switch
7. Platen APS
8. RADF APS
9. ATS/APS (bypass)
10. ATS/APS SW (tray 1)
11. ATS/APS SW (tray 2)
12. ATS/APS SW (tray 3)
13. ATS/APS SW (tray 4)
14. Platen AMS
15. RADF AMS
16, Staple mode reset
17. Key click sound
18. Job memory recall
19. Sheet insertion
20. 5.5"x8.5" original type
21. Rotation
22. 1 shot indication
13. List print [Job memory list; User setting list; Font pattern]
14. Appli. customize [File Edit; Image Edit]
15. Density Shift [Density shift 0; 1; 2; 3; 4; 5]
16. KRDS host 1. JAM concerns
2. SC concerns
3. NO TONER
4. NO PAPER
5. COPY QUALITY
6. OTHER REASON

Key Operator Mode 11-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
System Initial [1]

Set the following initial conditions of the copier.


• Time: Current date and time, summer time
• Language: Language used in LCD ( English)

Time [1]
Set the current date and time, and also the summer time.
❒ Default setting: Summer time off
Key Operator Mode Screen System Initial Setting Menu Screen Time Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 1. System Initial to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch
1. Time to display the Time Setting Screen.
3 Adjust the time.
The time that the copier currently has is displayed in the upper line, in the order of
date, month, year, and time (in 24-hour expression).
(1) Touch the left arrow (<<) and right arrow (>>) keys displayed under the SET TIME
to move the cursor to the number to be changed.
(2) Press the keypads on the Control panel to enter the number.
4 To activate the summer time function, touch SUMMER TIME to highlight it.
NOTE: This operation advances the current time of the copier by an hour. If any other time is required to be
set, contact your service representative.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen. If the other system initial setting change is required, touch the key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-6 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
System Initial [1] (continued)

Language [2]
Select the language used in the LCD.

❒ Default setting: English

Key Operator Mode Screen System Initial Setting Menu Screen Language Selection Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 1. System Initial to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch
2. Language to display the Language Selection Screen.
3 Touch ENGLISH, FRENCH, or SPANISH.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu
Screen. If the other system initial setting change is required, touch the key.
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2]

Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on,
when Auto/Reset timer is operated, or when [AUTO RESET] is pressed. These settings
can be changed by the key operator, as shown in this section.
Initially, i.e., at installation, the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet
Energy Star requirements:
Initial Setting
Copy Mode: 1-1
Copy Density: AES
Lens Mode: 1:1
Paper Tray: APS
Finisher: ON

When Initial settings are changed by the key operator, the new initial settings display
when the copier is powered on, when Auto/Reset timer is reached, or when [AUTO
RESET] is pressed.

The following initial settings can be changed by the key operator:


Copy mode: [RADF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-2; 2-1]
Copy density: [AES; manual]
Lens mode: [AMS; 1.00; ratio 0.25~4.00]
Paper tray: [APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray]
Output mode: [Tray 1, 2, 3; Sort, Group, Staple-sort, Face up tray 1; Staple
location; Automatic Rotation on/off] (machine with Finisher)
[Rotation+sort, Rotation+group, Group, Face up; Automatic
Rotation on/off] (machine without Finisher)

Setting procedures are described on the following pages.

NOTE: The most commonly-used settings are established at installation. Before changing any of the copier
settings, be sure that you understand the overall and long-range effect of the change.

11-8 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Copy Mode [1]


Set Copy mode to occur after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs.

❒ Setting options: RADF; 1-1; 1-2; 2-2; 2-1


❒ Default setting: RADF on, 1-1

Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen Copy Mode Initial Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen, then touch 1.
Copy mode to display the Copy Mode Initial Setting Screen.
3 Touch the setting you want for the initial condition of the copier.
If 2-2 or 2-1 mode is selected, RADF will also be selected, automatically. In this case,
the RADF must be in a closed position when power is turned ON, or when Auto/
Reset is functioning. Otherwise, the message “Please close RADF” will be displayed.
4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu
Screen. If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Density [2]
Set Copy density to be effective after power on or after Auto/Reset occurs.

❒ Setting options: AES; manual


❒ Default setting: AES on

Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen Copy Density Initial Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch 2. Density to display the Copy Density Initial Setting Screen.
4 Touch AES to select AES mode, or touch the density level required.
Nine exposure levels are displayed.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu
Screen. If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-10 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Magnification [3]
Set the magnification ratio you initially want to display after the user turns the power on
or after Auto/Reset restores the Initial settings.
NOTICE:
This setting should not conflict with the Initial setting for Paper Tray. For example, if
APS is selected for the initial paper tray setting, a ratio setting other than AMS will be
ignored.
❒ Setting options: AMS; 1.00; ratio 0.25~4.00

Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen Magnification Initial Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch 3. Magnification to display the Magnification Initial Setting Screen. The default
setting is 1.00.
4 Select the desired setting from the Magnification Initial Setting Screen:
To select 1.00 if it is not already displayed, touch 1.00.
To select another ratio, touch upper/lower arrow key to display the desired ratio, or
enter a 3-digit ratio using the keypad on the Control panel.
To select AMS, touch AMS.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu
Screen. If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Tray [4]
Set paper tray priority to be in effect after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset occurs.
This function sets tray priority, not paper size priority. Therefore, if paper size is changed
in the tray, the tray will still remain the priority tray.

The initial paper tray setting should not conflict with the initial setting for Lens Mode. For
example, if the initial paper tray setting is APS, the initial setting for paper tray priority
will be ignored.

❒ Setting options: APS; trays 1, 2, 3, 4, or Multi-sheet bypass tray


❒ Default setting: APS on, no specified tray

Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen Tray Initial Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch 4. Tray to display the Tray Initial Setting Screen.
4 Touch APS, or touch any tray key to select a specific tray.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu
Screen. If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-12 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Output [5]
Set initial Output mode of the Finisher or exit tray to be effective after power is turned on
or after Auto/Reset occurs.

Machine with Finisher


❒ Setting options: EXIT Tray 1/ Tray 2/Tray 3; OUTPUT MODE Non-sort/Sort/Group/Staple-sort/
Face up tray 1; Automatic Rotation on/off
❒ Default setting: EXIT Tray 2; OUTPUT MODE Non-sort; Automatic Rotation ON

Machine without Finisher


❒ Setting options: OUTPUT MODE Non-sort/Rotation+sort/Rotation+group/Group/Face up;
Automatic Rotation on/off
❒ Default setting: OUTPUT MODE Non-sort; Automatic Rotation ON

Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen

Output Mode Initial Setting Screen Staple Location Initial Setting Screen Output Mode Initial Setting Screen
(machine with Finisher) (machine without Finisher)

Key Operator Mode 11-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Output [5] (continued)


1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch 5. Output to display the Output Mode Initial Setting Screen.
4 For the machine with Finisher, perform the following operation and proceed to step
6.
To select the exit tray, touch TRAY 1, TRAY 2, or TRAY 3.
NOTE: If TRAY 1 is selected, SORT, GROUP and STAPLE are automatically dimmed. If TRAY2 or TRAY3
is selected, Face UP TRAY 1 is automatically dimmed.
To select the Output mode, touch SORT, GROUP, STAPLE, or Face UP TRAY 1.
NOTES:
1. If STAPLE is selected, SORT is automatically highlighted.
2. If selecting Non-sort mode, do not highlight any of the SORT, GROUP, STAPLE, and Face UP
TRAY 1.
To select the desired staple location, touch STAPLE SET. Touch the desired location
on the Staple Location Initial Setting Screen, and touch OK.
You can also select on/off of the Automatic rotation initial setting. To release the
Automatic rotation mode, touch AUTO so that it is no longer highlighted.
5 For the machine without Finisher, perform the following operation and proceed to
step 6.
To select the Output mode, touch Rotation+Sort, Rotation+Group, GROUP, or Face
UP.
You can also select on/off of the Automatic rotation initial setting. To release the
Automatic rotation mode, touch AUTO so that it is no longer highlighted.
6 Touch OK on the Output Mode Initial Setting Screen to complete the setting and
return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen. If other copier initial setting changes
are required, touch the desired key.
7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
8 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-14 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Copier Initial [2] (continued)

Non-Image Erase [6]


Select the mode of Non-Image Area Erase function to be in effect when this feature is
selected on the Application Selection Screen after power is turned on or after Auto/Reset
occurs.

❒ Setting options: Oblique erase, Rectangular erase; Original density Auto/Manual

Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen Non-Image Erase Initial
Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 2. Copier Initial to display the Copier Initial Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch 6. Non-image Erase to display the Non-Image Erase Initial Setting Screen.
4 Touch Oblique erase or Rectangular erase, as desired.
You can also select the original density level to obtain the optimum copy effect using
this function. Touch AUTO, or select the density level required. Five exposure levels
are provided.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Copier Initial Setting Menu
Screen. If other copier initial setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Preset Key [3]

Set two USERSETs of copy density and three Presets of magnification.

Density [1]
Output copying samples from 16 density levels from LIGHT to NORMAL or NORMAL to
DARK, then select the desired exposure and program it as Userset 1 or 2.
The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER 1 or USER 2 on the
Basic Screen.

Key Operator Mode Screen Preset Key Setting Menu Screen Userset Density Selection Screen

Userset Density Darker Setting Screen Userset Density Lighter Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 3. Preset key to display the Preset Key Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch 1. Density to display the Userset Density Selection Screen.
4 Place the original on the platen glass.
5 Touch Userset 1 or Userset 2. The Userset Density Darker Setting Screen will be
displayed.

11-16 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Preset Key [3] (continued)

Density [1] (continued)


6 To program Userset (1 or 2) to a darker level, perform the following operation, then
proceed to step 8.
(1) Touch No.1 1~4, No.2 5~8, No.3 9~12, or No.4 13~16, then press [START]. The
darker level sample sheet will be output.
(2) Select the desired darker exposure level from the sample sheet(s), then touch
the density No. from 1 to 16.
7 To program Userset (1 or 2) to a lighter level, perform the following operation, then
proceed to step 8.
(1) Touch Lighter to display the Userset Density Lighter Setting Screen.
(2) Touch No.1 1~4, No.2 5~8, No.3 9~12, or No.4 13~16, then press [START]. The
lighter level sample sheet will be output.
(3) Select the desired lighter exposure level from the sample sheet(s), then touch
the density No. from 1 to 16.
8 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the Userset Density Selection
Screen. If setting another Userset, repeat steps 5 to 8.
9 Touch RETURN on the Userset Density Selection Screen to return to the Preset Key
Setting Menu Screen. If the other preset key setting change is required, touch the
key.
10 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
11 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Preset Key [3] (continued)

Magnification [2]
PRESET and USERSET ratios are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to
accommodate copy paper size, and are available when RE is selected from the Basic
Screen. The userset ratios may be changed by the key operator as shown below.

❒ Setting options: USERSET 1, 2, and 3


❒ Default setting: USERSET 1: 2.00
USERSET 2: 4.00
USERSET 3: 0.50

Key Operator Mode Screen Preset Key Setting Menu Screen Userset Magnification Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 3. Preset Key to display the Preset Key Setting Menu Screen.
3 Touch 2. Magnification to display the Userset Magnification Setting Screen.
4 Touch the USERSET you want to change, then enter a ratio from 0.25~4.00, using
the keypad.
If a ratio under 0.25 is entered, 0.25 will be displayed.
If a ratio over 4.00 is entered, 4.00 will be displayed.
NOTE: If you wish to change PRESETs, contact your service representative.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Preset Key Setting Menu Screen.
If the other preset key setting change is required, touch the key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-18 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4]

This function can only be accessed by the key operator after an 8-digit ECM master key
code is entered. The Electronic Copy Monitor allows you to monitor all copying activity
by controlling ECM password accounts.

This feature can track copier usage for individual users and/or accounts as well as limit
access to the copier to authorized users. Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can
also be set. Use the ECM Key Operator Form provided at the end of this section to
record ECM password information.

The ECM stores up to 256 ECM passwords, each of which represents a separate
account that can be used for billing and recordkeeping. The number of users assigned to
each ECM password may depend upon the billing system in operation and the number
of individuals and departments using the copier. When the ECM is activated, copying
can be performed only after a valid 5-digit ECM password is entered.
Copy quantity and copy limit for each account can be visually confirmed on the screen.

If ECM needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service representative.

The following ECM settings can be made:

1. Change E.C.M. Data:


Create up to 256 individual ECM passwords, 00000~99999, and limit copy count for
each password to a max. 999,999 copies.

2. E.C.M. Data List:


Display the copy count for each ECM password, and change limit settings.

3. All Counter Reset:


Clear the copy count for all passwords.

4. ECM On/Off Setting:


Select the function to be on or off. The initial setting is Off.

5. Copy Limit Reached Effect:


Set the machine condition when the copy limit is reached. The machine can be set to
stop immediately or after a job is completed, or to only display a warning message.

Key Operator Mode 11-19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

How to Access the ECM Setting Mode

Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Master Key Code Screen ECM Setting Menu Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen. (See note 1.)
If the key operator password is not valid, check with your service representative.
2 Touch 4. E.C.M. The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8-digit ECM master key code, then
touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen. (See note 2.)
4 Select the desired ECM function, and make settings, as required.
To exit the ECM mode, touch RETURN on ECM Setting Menu Screen.
5 To exit the Key Operator mode, touch RETURN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to
restore the Basic Screen.

NOTES:
1 If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 If an invalid ECM master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.

11-20 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

Change ECM Data [1]


Assign an ID No. for an individual or for a group, then create individual password(s) for
each user. You can specify a name and limit count for each password.

❒ ECM ID No.: ID No. from 000~255, designated by key operator.


❒ ECM Password: Unique 5-digit numeric code programmed by key operator for user.
❒ User Name: max. 20 characters
❒ Copy Limit: 0 to 999,999 copies

Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM Data Input Screen 1

ECM Data Input Screen 2 ECM Data Input Screen 3 Name Input Screen

ECM Data Input Screen 4 Password Duplication Screen

Key Operator Mode 11-21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

Change ECM Data [1] (continued)


1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 4. E.C.M. Enter an 8-digit ECM master key code, then touch OK to display the
ECM Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid ECM master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
3 Touch 1. Change E.C.M. data to display the ECM Data Input Screen.
4 ID No. key is highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter an ID No. Enter a 3-digit
ID No. from 000~255 using the keypad on the Control panel.
5 Password key is highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter an ECM password.
Enter a 5-digit ECM password using the keypad on the Control panel.
NOTES:
1. Do not enter “00000”. The initial ECM password value is “00000”.
2. We recommend that you make a list of all ECM passwords and ID Nos.
6 Touch Name to display the Name Input Screen.
If you do not specify the name, proceed to step 10. This operation can be completed
normally without the name specified.
7 Input desired name according to the procedure below.
(1) Max. 20 characters can be entered.
(2) Use Upper arrow and Lower arrow keys on the Name Input Screen to input
uppercase and lowercase letters and symbols.
(3) Touch DEL. to delete the input character from the last.
(4) Touching CANCEL on the Name Input Screen will clear all the input characters.
(5) To change the existing name, touch DEL. to delete it and enter the new name.
8 Touch OK on the Name Input Screen to return to the ECM Data Input Screen.
9 Touch Limit. Limit key will be highlighted, enabling you to immediately enter copy
limit.
10 Enter a 6-digit copy limit for the ID No. using the keypad on the Control panel. The
input copy limit will be displayed on the right of the copy count.

NOTES:
1. If an invalid copy limit is entered, continue by entering the valid 6-digit copy limit.
2. Entering “000000” signifies no copy limit.
3. The Clear key, though it clears copy count, does not function on the ECM Data Input Screen.

11-22 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

Change ECM Data [1] (continued)


11 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen.
When the same ECM password has been used for another ID No., the Password
Duplication Screen will be displayed. To re-enter new password, touch YES and
return to the step 5. To create duplicate password, touch NO, then touch OK.
NOTE: It is possible to assign the same ECM password to different ID Nos. Note, however, that the number
of copies will be counted only for the ECM password with the smallest ID No. Copy count for the other
ID Nos. will not be monitored. We recommend you do not use duplicate ECM password.
12 If other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
13 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
14 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

ECM Data List [2]


Use this setting to display the list of copy count and copy limit for each ID No., and to
edit, add, and delete these ECM data.

❒ Edit items: ECM password, Name, copy limit, copy count

Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM Data List Screen

ECM Data Edit Screen Name Input Screen Delete Confirmation Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 4. E.C.M. Enter an 8-digit ECM master key code, then touch OK to display the
ECM Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid ECM master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
3 Touch 2. E.C.M. data list to display the ECM Data List Screen.

11-24 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

ECM Data List [2] (continued)


4 To delete the ECM data, operate the procedure below.
(1) Touch the ▲ Upper arrow or ▼ Lower arrow key on the right in the ECM Data List
Screen to highlight the ECM data to be deleted.
(2) Touch DEL. The Delete Confirmation Screen will be displayed.
(3) Touch Yes to delete, or touch No to cancel.
5 To add the ECM data, touch ADD. The ECM Data Input Screen with invalid Clear key
will be displayed. To input the ECM data, see p. 11-22 to p. 11-23.
6 To edit the ECM data, touch the ▲ Upper arrow or ▼ Lower arrow key on the right in
the ECM Data List Screen to highlight the ECM data to be edited, then touch EDIT.
The ECM Data Edit Screen with valid Clear key will be displayed.
(1) To edit the ECM password, touch Password. Enter a new 5-digit ECM password
using the keypad on the Control panel. Do not enter “00000”.
(2) To edit the name, touch Name. The Name Input Screen will be displayed. To
input a new name, see the procedure on p. 11-23.
(3) To edit the copy limit, Touch Limit. Enter a new 6-digit copy limit using the
keypad on the Control panel. Entering “000000” signifies no copy limit.
(4) To clear the copy count, touch Clear.
7 Touch OK on the ECM Data Input Screen or the ECM Data Edit Screen to complete
the settings and return to the ECM Data List Screen.
To cancel the changes made in step 5 or 6, touch RETURN to restore the ECM Data
List Screen.
8 Touch RETURN on the ECM Data List Screen to restore the ECM Setting Menu
Screen. If other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
9 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
10 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

All Counter Reset [3]


Reset the count for all ECM password Nos.

❒ Setting options: Reset All Counters yes or no

Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Setting Menu Screen All Counter Reset Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 4. E.C.M. Enter an 8-digit ECM master key code, then touch OK to display the
ECM Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid ECM master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
3 Touch 3. All counter reset to display the All Counter Reset Screen.
4 Touch Yes to reset all counters to zero.
Or, touch No not to reset. The selected key will be highlighted.
5 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen. If
other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-26 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

ECM On/Off Setting [4]


Use this function to turn ECM ON or OFF.
NOTE: If ECM OFF is selected while ECM functions, the copier will be enabled to perform copying job
without an ECM password entered, and both copy count and copy limit functions will be discontinued.

❒ Default setting: ECM on

Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM On/Off Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode. Enter a 4-digit
key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 4. E.C.M. Enter an 8-digit ECM master key code, then touch OK to display the
ECM Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid ECM master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
3 Touch 4. ECM On/Off setting to display the ECM On/Off Setting Screen.
4 Touch ON to activate ECM or touch OFF to de-activate ECM.
The selected key will be highlighted.
5 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen.
If other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 Touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) [4] (continued)

Copy Limit Reached Effect [5]


Use this function to select whether the copier will stop when the count limit is reached, or
if the copier will complete the copy job before stopping when reaching maximum copy
count.

❒ Setting options: Immediately, After job, Warning


❒ Default setting: After job

Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Setting Menu Screen Copy Limit Reached Effect Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 4. E.C.M. Enter an 8-digit ECM master key code, then touch OK to display the
ECM Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid ECM master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit code.
3 Touch 5. Copy Limit Reached effect to display the Copy Limit Reached Effect Screen.
4 Select setting option:
Touch Immediately to stop the copier when the copy limit is reached.
In this case, the paper in process will be completed, and the message “Enter ECM
password” will display after the copier stops.
Touch After job to stop the copier after the current job is completed.
Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached.
5 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen. If
other ECM setting changes are required, touch the desired key.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-28 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Lock Job Memory [5]

Use this function to lock/unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed.
A locked job is indicated by a lock icon ( ) on the job number of the Job Selection Screen.
The settings of a locked job cannot be changed.
❒ Setting options: Lock Job memory; Unlock Job memory; Delete Job memory
Key Operator Mode Screen Job Memory Lock/Delete Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 5. Lock Job memory to display the Job Memory Lock/Delete Screen.
3 To lock or unlock a job memory, operate the procedure below.
(1) Use ▲ Upper arrow and ▼ Lower arrow keys on the right in the Job Memory
Lock/Delete Screen to scroll to the job to be locked/unlocked.
(2) Touch the desired job number key to highlight it.
(3) Touch Job Lock. The job to be locked will display the lock icon in the job number.
The previously locked job will be unlocked and the lock icon will disappear.
4 To delete a job memory, operate the procedure below.
(1) Use ▲ Upper arrow and ▼ Lower arrow keys on the right in the Job Memory
Lock/Delete Screen to scroll to the job to be deleted.
(2) Touch the desired job number key to highlight it.
(3) Touch DEL. Programs and the name will be deleted from the job memory.
NOTES:
• A locked job can also be deleted, with the lock on the job number released at the same time.
• Once deleted, the programs cannot be restored.
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, touch the desired key.
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Paper Type [6]

Use this function to indicate a specific paper type for each tray key on the Basic Screen.
This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always
placed in a specific paper tray.

❒ Setting options: ---- (blank), RECYCL, COLOR, LTRHD, SPCL, LABELS, INVOIC, LEGAL

Key Operator Mode Screen Paper Type Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 6. Paper type to display the Paper Type Setting Screen.
3 Touch the desired paper tray to highlight it.
4 Touch the ▲ Upper arrow or ▼ Lower arrow key to select paper type.
The name of paper type displayed on the highlighted tray key will change as follows:
---- (blank) → RECYCL → COLOR → LTRHD → SPCL. → LABELS → INVOIC → LEGAL
Touch the arrow keys until the desired name appears.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. If
other key operator settings are required, touch the desired key.
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-30 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Panel Contrast [7]

Use this feature to adjust the contrast and backlight of the touch screen portion of the
Control panel.
NOTE: The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help Screen provided that the feature
setting is activated by Service. When the Control panel contrast key is pressed, the Contrast
adjustment screen will be displayed. Contact your service representative if the feature is required.

❒ Setting options: Contrast/Backlight dark; normal; light


❒ Default settings: Contrast normal; Back light normal

Key Operator Mode Screen Panel Contrast Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 7. Panel contrast to display the Panel Contrast Screen.
3 To adjust the contrast, touch DARK, NOR., or LIGHT of CONTRAST.
4 To adjust the backlight, touch DARK, NOR., or LIGHT of BACKLIGHT.
5 Touch RETURN to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen.
If other key operator settings are required, touch the desired key.
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Key Operator Data [8]

Use this screen to enter the extension number of the key operator indicated on the Help
Screen.

❒ Setting options: 6-digit key operator telephone extension


Max. 20 character key operator name

Key Operator Mode Screen Key Operator Data Input Screen Name Input Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 8. Key ope. Data to display the Key Operator Data Input Screen.
3 Touch Name to display the Name Input Screen.
Input desired name according to the procedure below.
(1) Max. 20 characters can be entered.
(2) Use Upper arrow and Lower arrow keys on the Name Input Screen to input
uppercase and lowercase letters and symbols.
(3) Touch DEL. to delete the input character from the last.
(4) Touching CANCEL on the Name Input Screen will clear all the input characters.
(5) To change the existing name, touch DEL. to delete it and enter the new name.
4 Touch OK on the Name Input Screen to return to the Key Operator Data Input Screen.
5 Touch For Assistance.
Enter an extension number up to 6 digits from the keypad on the Control panel.
The hyphen will be indicated as a space in the Help Screen.
If less than 6 digits are entered, the screen will not change when OK is touched.
NOTE: If an invalid extension number is entered, continue by entering the valid 8-digit number.
6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. If
other key operator settings are required, touch the desired key.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.
11-32 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9]

This function can be accessed only by the key operator after a unique 4-digit Weekly
timer master key code is entered.
The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the
machine on a daily or hourly basis. The timer can be programmed specifically for lunch
breaks, weekends and holidays, or any time the copier is not required.
In Addition, Timer Interrupt can be enabled (with or without a password requirement) to
allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the
Timer function.

Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer


• The power plug is inserted into the socket.
• The main power switch and operation power switch are turned on.
• The current date and time are correctly set.
If the Weekly timer needs to be activated on your machine, contact your service
representative.

The following Weekly timer settings can be made.


1. Weekly Timer Setting
Enable and disable the Timer function
2. Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set
Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the
entire week.
3. Machine Working Day Individual Set
Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer, for all Mondays through Sundays,
and/or individually for each day of the given month.
4. Lunch Hour Off Function
Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will go off and on.
5. Password Setting
Require Password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage
time.

NOTES:
• The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock, where hour [1] is the first hour after midnight; and hour
[24] is the hour of midnight. For example, 6 a.m. is 06:00 hours; 6 p.m. is 18:00 hours.
• The [AUTO RESET] key is used to change numbers determined by the SET touch key.

Key Operator Mode 11-33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode


Key Operator Mode Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 9. Weekly Timer.
The Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen displays, if a code is required.
3 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key
code, then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code.
4 Select the desired Weekly timer function, and make settings, as required.
5 To exit the Weekly timer mode, touch RETURN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen.
6 To exit the Key operator mode, touch RETURN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to
restore the Basic Screen.

11-34 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Weekly Timer Setting [1]


❒ Setting options: Weekly timer ON; OFF
❒ Default setting: Weekly timer OFF

Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen W.T. ON/OFF Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 9. Weekly Timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code.
3 Touch 1. Weekly timer setting to display the Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Screen.
4 Touch YES to activate Weekly timer, or touch NO to de-activate Weekly timer.
The selected key will be highlighted.
5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen. If other Weekly timer settings are required, select the desired menu item.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set [2]


Use this function to set the On/Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the week,
or set the collective time for the entire week, i.e., the same On/Off time for each day.
❒ Setting option: Weekly timer ON time; OFF time
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen W.T. ON/OFF Time Setting Screen W.T. ON/OFF Time Block Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 9. Weekly Timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code.
3 Touch 2. Weekly timer copier ON/OFF time set to display the W.T. ON/OFF Time
Setting Screen.
4 Use the procedure below to set the ON time and OFF time for the desired days of
the week.
(1) Touch EDIT to display the W.T. ON/OFF Time Block Setting Screen.
(2) Touch and highlight the keys of the desired day of the week from Monday
through Sunday to set the same ON time and OFF time.
(3) Touch ON to enter the ON time.
Enter a 2-digit ON-hour (ex. 8 a.m. is 08) and a 2-digit ON-minute (ex. 7 min. is
07) using the keypad on the Control panel.
(4) Touch OFF to enter the OFF time.
Enter a 2-digit OFF-hour (ex. 6 p.m. is 18) and a 2-digit OFF-minute using the
keypad on the Control panel.
NOTES:
• If ON-time and OFF-time are the same, power will not go on.
• Be sure to enter both ON-time and OFF time.
• Be sure to enter the On/Off time for a day off also, so that you can specify the machine working
days on the W.T. Working Day Individual/Collective Setting Screen.
11-36 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set [2] (continued)


(5) Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the W.T. ON/OFF Time Setting
Screen.
(6) Confirm the ON-time and OFF-time on the W.T. ON/OFF Time Setting Screen.
5 Use the procedure below to delete the ON-time and OFF-time of the day of the
week.
(1) Use the ▲ Upper arrow and ▼ Lower arrow keys to select the day of the week to
be deleted.
(2) Touch DEL.
(3) On-time and OFF-time of the day of the week are deleted and “--:--” are
displayed.
NOTE: On the day of the week with the ON/OFF-time deleted, you can not turn on the power.

6 Touch RETURN to complete the settings and return to the Weekly Timer Setting
Menu Screen. If other Weekly timer settings are required, select the desired menu
item.
7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
8 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Machine Working Day Individual Set [3]


Use this function to set the On/Off condition of the copier for a given month. Set the On/
Off condition for specific days; or collectively, for all Mondays through Sundays of the
given month. The default setting is collective: On for Mondays through Saturdays, and
Off for Sundays.

Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen W.T. Working Day Individual Setting Screen W.T. Working Day Collective Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 9. Weekly Timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code.
3 Touch 3. Machine working day individual set to display the W.T. Working Day
Individual Setting Screen.
4 Use the procedure below to individually set the timer-active days.
(1) Touch the key for the timer-active day to be highlighted.
(2) Use the ▲ Upper arrow and ▼ Lower arrow keys to scroll to the desired month.
5 Use the procedure below to collectively set the timer-active days by the day of the
week.
(1) Touch Collective Set to display the W.T. Working Day Collective Setting Screen.
(2) To set the Timer action ON, touch ON for the desired day.
To set the Timer action OFF, touch OFF for the desired day.
If you touch an already-highlighted key, no change will occur.
(3) Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the W.T. Working Day Individual
Setting Screen.
NOTE: The selected days will be highlighted in black on the W.T. Working Day Individual Setting Screen
when restored, however, the working day individual setting has priority so that you can make setting
change for each day on that screen, if desired.

11-38 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Machine Working Day Individual Set [3] (continued)


6 Touch RETURN to complete the settings and return to the Weekly Timer Setting
Menu Screen. If other Weekly timer settings are required, select the desired menu
item.
7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
8 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Lunch Hour Off Function [4]


The Weekly timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day. Use the Lunch hour
off function to shut down power during the lunch break and then turn it on again
according the Weekly timer function setting. Only one off-time interval can be
programmed.
❒ Setting options: Lunch hour off function ON;OFF
Lunch hour off-time
❒ Default setting: Lunch hour off function OFF
Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 9. Weekly Timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code.
3 Touch 4. Lunch hour off function to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen.
4 Use the procedure below to activate Lunch hour off.
(1) Touch Function ON to highlight it.
(2) Touch off-time.
Enter a 2-digit off-hour (ex. 9 a.m. is 09) and a 2-digit off-minute (ex. 7 min. is 07)
using the keypad on the Control panel.
(3) Touch on-time.
Enter a 2-digit on-hour and a 2-digit on-minute using the keypad on the Control
panel.
5 To de-activate Lunch hour off, touch Function OFF. The time setting area will appear
grayed out and cannot be selected. The Function OFF setting is the factory default
setting.
11-40 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Lunch Hour Off Function [4] (continued)


6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu
Screen. If other Weekly timer settings are required, select the desired menu item.
7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
8 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Weekly Timer [9] (continued)

Password Setting [5]


Use this password setting mode to establish a 4-digit password requirement for using
Timer Interrupt function. The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be
interrupted without the requirement for password entry.

❒ Default setting: Timer interrupt password 0000

Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen W.T. Interrupt Password Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 9. Weekly Timer. Enter your 4-digit Weekly timer master key code, then touch
OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Weekly timer master key code is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit code.
3 Touch 5. Password setting to display the W.T. Interrupt Password Setting Screen.
4 Input a new 4-digit password using touch panel keypad, and touch OK to complete
the setting.
NOTE: When the password setting is 0000 (factory default setting), timer interrupt can be used simply by
pressing the power switch.
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen. If other Weekly
timer settings are required, select the desired menu item.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

11-42 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Touch Panel Adjustment [10]

Use this feature to check the malfunction of the LCD touch screen due to the shift in
position of the touch sensor.

❒ When the Control Panel Adjustment Screen does not display in step 2, press one from keypad
[0] ~ [9].

Key Operator Mode Screen Touch Panel Adjustment Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 Touch 10. Touch panel adj. to display the Touch Panel Adjustment Screen.
3 Touch the “+” indication at the upper right and lower left corners on the Control Panel
Adjustment Screen. The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area
of the screen.
4 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the
message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line.
5 Touch the CHECKs at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if
the buzzer tone functions normally.
6 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 4, or the buzzer
tone does not sound in step 5, repeat the adjustment procedure from 3 to 5, or
contact Konica service representative.
7 Press [START] on the Control panel to complete the setting.

Key Operator Mode 11-43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Power Save [11]

Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off
become activated. Or, select the Auto Shut Off function to On or Off.

❒ Setting options: See list below


❒ Default settings: Auto low power; 15 min.
Auto shut off; 60 min.

Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Power Save Timer Setting Screen

Auto Shut Off ON/OFF Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 To display menus 11. to 16. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the Lower
arrow key.
3 Touch 11. Power Save to display the Power Save Timer Setting Screen.
4 Touch the timer key below the “Auto Low Power” indicator to select a specific waiting
period before activation of the Auto Low Power function. The default setting is 15min.
If the Auto Shut off function is not desired, proceed to step 6.
If the “Auto Low Power” indicator light is dim and the timer keys cannot be selected,
proceed to step 5.

11-44 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Power Save [11] (continued)
NOTES:
• The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting.
• If the same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power, the Auto Shut Off will
function instead of Auto Low Power.
5 Touch the timer key displayed under the “Auto Shut off” indicator on the Power Save
Timer Setting Screen, to select the period of time to wait before activating Auto Shut
Off. The default setting is 60 min.
NOTE: If the period of time selected for Auto Shut Off is shorter than the Auto Low Power setting, the setting
for Auto Low Power will be automatically changed to that of the Auto Shut Off setting, and the Auto
Low Power indicator light will dim. In this case, Auto Low Power will not function.
6 Touch NEXT on the Timer Setting Screen to display the Auto Shut Off ON/OFF
Setting Screen.
7 Touch ON to activate Auto Shut Off, or touch OFF to de-activate it. The default
setting is the ON setting.
When OFF is selected, Auto Shut Off will not function and the period of time for Auto
Low Power can be selected from 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, and 240min.
8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
9 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [12]

This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below. Underlined
settings indicate factory settings. See pp. 11-48~11-50 for details on Memory Settings.

SW No. Item Setting (default is underlined)


No.01: Auto reset timer OFF/ 30sec./ 60 sec./ 90 sec./ 120 sec./ 150 sec./
180 sec./ 210 sec./ 240 sec./ 270 sec./ 300 sec.
No.02: AUTO/RESET effect Full-auto/ Initial setting
No.03: Load RADF effect RADF/ RADF + AUTO RESET
No.04: Non Image A. Erase ON/ APS/AMS only
No.05: RADF frame erasure None/ 1 mm/ 2 mm/ 3 mm/ 4 mm/ 5 mm
No.06: Auto tray switch OFF/ ON
No.07: Platen APS OFF/ ON
No.08: RADF APS OFF/ ON
No.09: ATS/APS (Bypass) OFF/ ON
No.10: ATS/APS SW (Tray 1) OFF/ ON
No.11: ATS/APS SW (Tray 2) OFF/ ON
No.12: ATS/APS SW (Tray 3) OFF/ ON
No.13: ATS/APS SW (Tray 4) OFF/ ON
No.14: Platen AMS OFF/ ON
No.15: RADF AMS OFF/ ON
No.16: Staple mode reset OFF/ ON
No.17: Key click sound OFF/ Low/ High
No.18: Job memory recall OFF/ ON
No.19: Sheet insertion Tray 1/ Tray 2/ Tray 3/ Tray 4/ Bypass
No.20: 5.5x8.5 orig. type Landscape/ Portrait
No.21: Rotation OFF/ ON/ APS/AMS/reduce/ APS/AMS only/ APS
only
No.22: 1 SHOT Indication 1 sec./ 2 sec./ 3 sec./ 4 sec./ 5 sec.

11-46 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [12] (continued)
Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Memory Switch Screen 1

Memory Switch Screen 2 Memory Switch Screen 3

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 To display menus 11. to 16. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the Lower
arrow key.
3 Touch 12. Memory SW to display the Memory Switch Screen. The Memory Switch
Screen can be scrolled to the third screen.
4 Use the procedure below to select the desired item and change the setting.
(1) Use Upper arrow and Lower arrow keys at the lower left on the Memory
Switch Screen to scroll the screen.
(2) Touch ▲ Upper arrow or ▼ Lower arrow key at the right on the Memory Switch
Screen to highlight the desired item.
(3) Touch EDIT to change the setting of the highlighted item.
(4) Repeat above steps (1) to (3) to make several changes in succession.
5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [12] (continued)

The following functions can be provided by the Memory switch settings.

[1] Auto reset timer


Sets the time interval for the machine to reset to the initial condition.
Options: Off or 30/60/90/120/150/180/210/240/270/300 seconds.

[2] Auto/reset effect


Sets the condition of Copy mode, Copy density, Magnification, and Paper tray selection
when the [AUTO/RESET] key is pressed.
Options: Full-auto (factory setting) or Initial (key operator setting). Initial is the default
setting.

[3] Load RADF effect


Determines how the machine initializes when it is in the platen copy mode (non RADF)
and an original is inserted in the RADF feed tray.
Options: RADF and RADF + AUTO/RESET. The RADF option will activate the RADF
without resetting any other features. The RADF + AUTO/RESET option will activate the
RADF and reset the machine to the features programmed in memory switch #2.

[4] Non Image Area Erase


Establishes how the machine determines the image area of the copy.
Options: ON and APS/AMS only. ON option limits the copy image area to that of the
original. The APS/AMS only option limits the copy image area to that of the copy paper
sizes and the magnification automatically selected by the machine.

[5] RADF frame erasure


Sets the amount of frame erase when using the RADF.
Options: None, 1mm/ 2mm/ 3mm/ 4mm/ 5mm.

[6] Auto tray switch


During a copy job when ATS is on and multiple paper trays are loaded with the same
size paper, the machine will automatically switch to another tray when the initial tray runs
out of paper. Refer to memory switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature for each
tray.

[7] Platen APS


This feature allows the machine to automatically detect the size of the original placed on
the glass and select the same size copy paper. Refer to switches 9 through 13 to
activate this feature for each tray.

11-48 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [12] (continued)

[8] RADF APS


This feature allows the machine to detect the size of the original fed through the RADF.
Refer to switches 9 through 13 to activate this feature for each tray.

[9] ATS/APS (Bypass)


This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Multi-sheet bypass.

[10] ATS/APS SW (Tray 1)


This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 1.

[11] ATS/APS SW (Tray 2)


This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 2.

[12] ATS/APS SW (Tray 3)


This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 3.

[13] ATS/APS SW (Tray 4)


This setting activates ATS and APS (platen and RADF) for Tray 4.

[14] Platen AMS


This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper magnification ratio
when copy paper size is selected manually and an original is placed on the platen glass.

[15] RADF AMS


This feature allows the machine to automatically select the proper magnification ratio
when copy paper size is selected manually and an original is fed from the RADF.

[16] Staple mode reset


When copying in the sort/staple mode, this setting allows the machine to automatically
reset to non-staple mode when the job in progress is completed.

[17] Key click sound


When this feature is Low or High, the machine activates a buzzer sound when the touch
sensitive screen is touched or any key is pressed. This confirms the machine recognition
of the selection.

[18] Job memory recall


This feature allows the machine to initialize using selections stored in job memory No.15
when the power is turned on or the [AUTO/RESET] key is pressed.
NOTE: This function works only when job memory No.15 is registered.
Key Operator Mode 11-49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Memory Switch [12] (continued)

[19] Sheet insertion


This setting allows selection of tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, or Bypass as the source of
the inserted sheets.

[20] 5.5x8.5 orig. type


Selects orientation of 5.5x8.5 size originals.
Options: Landscape or portrait.

[21] Rotation
When turned on the feature allows the machine to automatically rotate an 8.5"x11"
original image to match the manually selected paper size. For example, if an original is
placed in the RADF or on the platen glass in the 8.5"x11"R position and the 8.5"x11"
paper size is selected, the machine will rotate the image to fit the 8.5"x11" paper.

[22] 1 SHOT indication time


Determines the duration of messages that are displayed, i.e., 50 SHEETS MAXIMUM IN
STAPLE MODE. Options: 1/ 2/ 3/ 4 or 5 seconds.

11-50 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
List Print [13]

Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items.
• Job memory list: Programmed contents of Job memory
• User setting list: Machine informations managed by ECM and home position settings
selected by user
• Font pattern: Font patterns used in the machine

Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 List Print Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 To display menus 11. to 16. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the Lower
arrow key.
3 Touch 13. List Print to display the List Print Screen.
4 Touch Job memory list, User setting list, or Font pattern to highlight it.
5 Touch OK to print out the desired list.
Press the [STOP/CLEAR] key on the Control panel to stop printing.
After completion of printing, the copier will automatically return to the List Print
Screen. When printing other lists, return to step 4.
6 Touch CANCEL to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Application Customize [14]

Use this function to rearrange, display, or hide the application keys on the Application
Selection Screen.

Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Application Customize Screen

Item Selection Screen File Edit Customize Screen Image Edit Customize Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode. Enter a 4-digit
key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 To display menus 11. to 16. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the Lower
arrow key.
3 Touch 14. Appli. customize to display the Application Customize Screen.
The application function keys currently set are displayed on the screen.
When setting change is desired, touch EDIT to display the Item Selection Screen.
4 Touch FILE EDIT or IMAGE EDIT, as desired.
5 On the File/Image Edit Customize Screen, touch to highlight the desired application
function key on the right, then touch ADD. Selected key will move to the left part of
the screen, while the key on the right will be dimmed to show inactivity.
6 To cancel the selection you made, touch to highlight the desired key on the left, then
touch DEL. The selected key will disappear.
Touch Pre-set to restore the previous setting.

11-52 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Application Customize [14] (continued)

7 Touch OK to complete the settings, then touch EDIT to return to the Item Selection
Screen.
Touch another item key, if desired, or touch Initialize to restore the factory setting.
8 Touch RETURN to restore the Application Customize Screen. Confirm the setting you
made on this screen.
9 Touch OK to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator settings
are required, select the desired menu item.
10 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.

Key Operator Mode 11-53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Density Shift [15]

Density shift divides each of nine density levels into two levels of lighter and three levels
of darker when used in combination with Text/Photo Enhance.
Density shift selection can be made in each of four Text/Photo Enhance modes; Text/
Photo (general), Text, Photo, and Increase Contrast.
❒ Setting options: Density shift 0/ 1/ 2/ 3 (standard)/ 4/ 5
Density shift 0
Density shift 1
Density shift 2

Density shift 3
Density shift 4
Density shift 5

Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Density Shift Setting Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 To display menus 11. to 16. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the Lower
arrow key.
3 Touch 15. Density Shift to display the Density Shift Setting Screen.
4 Select the Text/Photo Enhance mode.
Touch Text/Photo, TEXT, PHOTO, or Increase contrast to highlight it, then enter the
desired density shift (from 0 to 5) using the Control panel keypad.
5 Touch OK to complete the settings and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen. If
other key operator settings are required, select the desired menu item.
6 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.
11-54 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
KRDS Host [16]

When activated, the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by a Konica


service representative. In case of machine trouble, select the KRDS host option. Your
service representative will contact you to determine the appropriate means for resolving
the problem.
❒ Setting options: Call for JAM; SC; No toner; No paper; Copy quality; Other reason
Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 KRDS Host Menu Screen

Start Call Screen

1 Press [HELP] to display the Help Screen, then touch Key-Ope mode.
Enter a 4-digit key operator password, then touch OK to display the Key Operator
Mode Screen.
NOTE: If an invalid Key operator password is entered, continue by entering the valid 4-digit password.
2 To display menus 11. to 16. of the Key Operator Mode Screen, touch the Lower
arrow key.
3 Touch 16. KRDS host to display the KRDS Host Menu Screen.
4 Touch 1. JAM concerns, 2. SC concerns, 3. NO TONER, 4. NO PAPER, 5. COPY
QUALITY, or 6. OTHER REASON, as required.
The Start Call Screen will be displayed.
5 Touch START to call remote service representative.
6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen. If other key operator
settings are required, select the desired menu item.
7 If no further changes are required, touch RETURN to restore the Basic Screen to
perform copying operations.
Key Operator Mode 11-55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Key Operator Mode
Key Operator ECM Form

No. Password Count/Limit No. Password Count/Limit

11-56 Key Operator Mode

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 12: Maintenance & Supplies

Loading Paper
Add Paper Indicator
Using the HELP Key
Loading Paper in Universal Tray
Programming Copy Size of Universal Tray
To Display Universal Tray Size Selection Screen
Loading Paper in LCT (Large Capacity Tray)
Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray

Adding Toner

Inserting a New Staple Cartridge

Preventive Maintenance

Cleaning the Left Partition Glass

Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover

Service, Repairs, Supplies

Maintenance 12-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper

Add Paper Indicator ( )


The Add paper indicator light goes on when a tray is empty and flashes when the key for
that tray is touched. Add paper to a tray when the Add paper indicator light is on or
flashing.

Do not exceed the following tray limits:


Machine with DB-208 Machine with DB-208A Machine with DB-608
Tray 1: 500 sheets 20lb Tray 1: 500 sheets 20lb Tray 1: 500 sheets 20lb
Tray 2: 500 sheets 20lb Tray 2: 500 sheets 20lb Tray 2: 500 sheets 20lb
Tray 3: 500 sheets 20lb Multi-sheet bypass tray: Tray 3: 1,500 sheets 20lb
Tray 4: 500 sheets 20lb 100 sheets 20lb Multi-sheet bypass tray:
Multi-sheet bypass tray: 100 sheets 20lb
100 sheets 20lb
NOTE: Do not load above the red line on rear guide.

Using the HELP key


To learn how to load paper at any time, press [HELP], then touch any tray to display
instructions on the touch screen. For details on tray position size vs. paper size, see
Section 4: Paper Information.

Before loading When placing a stack


paper, fan the stack of paper into the tray,
to prevent sheets be sure to load it with
from sticking the curl turning up, i.e.,
together. with concave side up.

See the following pages for instructions on loading paper in trays 1~4 and Multi-sheet
bypass tray.

12-2 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper (continued)

Loading Paper in Universal Tray


Universal tray: Tray 1~4 (machine with DB-208)
Tray 1~2 (machine with DB-208A)
Tray 1~2 (machine with DB-608)
When changing the paper size of the tray, be sure to program the new size on the
Universal Tray Size Selection Screen; otherwise the correct paper size cannot be
displayed and “Univ.” will be displayed on the Basic Screen. See p. 12-4.

1 Withdraw universal tray from the machine.


2 Remove the rear guide plate, and insert it into the position of your desired copy size.
NOTE: Be sure to align and set the rear guide plate to the paper; otherwise the machine may malfunction.

3 Stack paper with curl side up.


4 While pressing the release knob, move the slide guide plate against the paper.
5 Push in the universal tray until it locks into place.

Maintenance 12-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper (continued)

Programming Copy Size of Universal Tray


When changing the paper size of the universal tray as described in the previous page,
perform the procedure below to program the new size.

Universal Tray Size Selection Screen

1 When the paper size of the universal tray is changed, the Basic Screen will
automatically change to the Universal Tray Size Selection Screen.
NOTES:
1 The Universal Tray Size Selection Screen cannot be displayed if any screen other than the Basic
Screen is displayed.
2 Pressing [AUTO RESET] will restore the Basic Screen without the copy size programmed.

2 Touch the size key.


If the correct size is selected, the Basic Screen will be restored automatically.
If the selected size is incorrect, the machine displays the message “Please select
correct tray size” and will not return to the Basic Screen.

To Display Universal Tray Size Selection Screen


When “Univ” is displayed as the copy size indication on the Basic Screen, you can
display the Universal Tray Size Selection Screen to select the copy size.
1 Touch Univ. on the Basic Screen. The Universal Tray Size Selection Screen will be
displayed.
2 Select the correct size according to the step 2 mentioned above.

12-4 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper (continued)

Loading Paper in LCT (Large Capacity Tray)


LCT: Tray 3 (machine with DB-608)

1 Withdraw the LCT from the machine.


2 Stack paper with curl side up.
The bottom of the tray will lower a bit due to the weight of stacked paper.
3 Push in the tray until it locks into place.

Maintenance 12-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Loading Paper (continued)

Loading Paper in Multi-Sheet Bypass Tray

1 Open the Multi-sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the copier.
When loading 11”x17” or 8.5”x14” paper, pull out the right edge to extend the tray.
2 Insert copy paper while adjusting the paper guides to the paper size.
Insert transparency film one sheet at a time; or, stack paper up to 100 sheets 20 lb
Bond.
NOTE: For detailed copy paper information, see p. 4-6.
3 When copying is completed, close the Multi-sheet bypass tray.

12-6 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Adding Toner

CAUTION
Keep toner cartridge away from children. Although the toner is non-toxic, do not inhale it or allow it to
enter your eyes. In case the toner comes in contact with eyes, please consult your physician.

• When toner supply is low, “Please add toner” message displays on the touch screen.
• Before adding toner, read directions on the toner cartridge label.

1 Open the machine front door. Pull the toner unit 90° to the right.
2 Push and release the cartridge lock lever to the right until it stops.
3 Remove the empty toner cartridge.
4 Shake the toner cartridge several times to loosen toner.
5 Remove the toner cartridge cap.
6 Set the new toner cartridge into the toner unit.
NOTE: Align the ▲ mark on the toner cartridge with ▼ mark on the toner unit as illustrated above.
7 Return and lock the cartridge lock lever to the left until it stops.
The lock tape will be pushed out.
8 Remove the lock tape.
9 Return the toner unit to its original position, then close the machine front door
securely.

Maintenance 12-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Inserting a New Staple Cartridge

When staple cartridge is empty, “Please separate finisher from the copier and replace
staples” message will display on the touch screen.

1 While pressing the Finisher release lever, slide the Finisher to the left.
2 Push down the staple cartridge lever to release the staple cartridge from the
cartridge holder.
3 Remove the staple cartridge.
4 Remove the empty staple case.
5 Firmly insert the new staple case into the staple cartridge by aligning the arrow sides
of both case and cartridge.
6 Remove the holder tape holding staples in place.
7 Insert the staple cartridge and push in it securely.
8 Slide the Finisher to the right and connect securely the Finisher with the main body.

12-8 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Preventive Maintenance

After a set number of copies have been made on your copier, Preventive Maintenance
(PM) will be required for maintaining optimal performance.

When preventive maintenance is due, a message will prompt you to contact your service
representative for maintenance.

Maintenance 12-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Cleaning the Left Partition Glass

The glass partition at the far left of the platen glass is designed for real-time scanning from
the RADF. Keep this glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting in dark
lines on the copies.

Raise the document cover, and clean the left


partition glass with a clean soft cloth.

Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover


The platen glass and the inner surface of the document feeder should be kept clean.
Otherwise, soil marks may be copied.

Raise the document cover, and clean the glass and


inner surface of the document cover with a clean
soft cloth.

NOTES:
1. The glass may also be cleaned with a soft cloth dampened
slightly with water; or with an antistatic cleaner recommended
by your Konica service representative.
2. Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to
clean any portion of the copier.

12-10 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Maintenance & Supplies
Service, Repairs, Supplies

Service
Enter the name and telephone number of your Konica service representative, plus the
machine serial number in the space provided below:

(Service Representative)

(Tel. No.)

(Machine Serial No.)

Repairs
When calling for repairs, be sure to have all necessary information at hand, such as the
machine serial number and your own telephone number. If copy quality is the concern,
bring a sample copy with you to the phone so that it can be described to your service
representative.

Enter the telephone number for Repairs in the space provided below:

(Repairs Tel. No.)

Supplies
Be sure to use only supplies recommended by Konica Business Technologies, Inc. To
maintain your supply inventory, check your supplies at regular intervals, and order
supply items before they are depleted or even nearly depleted.

Enter the telephone number for ordering supplies in the space provided below.

(Supplies Tel. No.)

The PCUA number for the Drum used in the 7045 copier is: 950411.
No other Drum has been approved for use in this model.

Maintenance 12-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting Section 13 : Troubleshooting

Call for Service


Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble

Memory Overflow
Copy Conditions Using Memory
Action 1
Action 2

Power OFF/ON Screen


Clearing Mishandled Paper
Troubleshooting Tips

Troubleshooting 13-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Call for Service

CAUTION
A Call for Service message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of
your Konica service representative.
Call for Service Screen

1 Immediately make note of the Report code No. indicated in the upper portion of the
screen.
2 Turn OFF the power switch and main power switch.
3 Unplug the machine.
4 Contact your Konica service representative and report the condition and code No.

13-2 Troubleshooting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Call for Service (continued)

Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble


If the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen, you may
continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU
that are not affected by the trouble. To obtain this limited functionality of the copier,
consult your Konica service representative. Be sure to utilize the limited function only
temporarily, and arrange for machine repair immediately.

1 If the limited use of the copier is available, not the Report code but the following
message is displayed in the message area.

Tray 1 failure
Press AUTO to select except this tray

2 Press [AUTO RESET].

Please switch ON/OFF


E 18-2

3 Turn OFF then ON the power switch.


Copying job can be continued without using the portion in trouble (ex. Tray 1).

CAUTION
EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION, IMMEDIATELY
CONTACT YOUR KONICA SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE SCREEN
IS DISPLAYED.

Troubleshooting 13-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Memory Overflow

In certain modes, the 7045 printer/copier uses memory to make operations convenient
and smooth flowing. Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is
inadequate for the copy conditions selected. Should memory overflow occur frequently, it
is recommended that you contact your Konica service representative to extend the
memory capacity in your machine.

Memory overflow messages are displayed as follows:

If continuous working
check output after copying

- Memory full - Start => START key


Cancel => ST/CL key
(Alternately displayed)

To handle the Memory overflow condition while in a job, take the appropriate action
indicated below for each copy mode. These actions enable you to continue the job or
suspend the job.
Procedures for Action 1 and Action 2 are on p. 13-6 and p. 13-7, respectively.

13-4 Troubleshooting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Memory Overflow (continued)

Copy Conditions Using Memory


The following is a list of copy modes supported by memory, along with the appropriate
type action to be taken for each mode in the event Memory overflow occurs. Procedures
for Action 1 and Action 2 are on p. 13-6 and 13-7, respectively.

• 1s2 Copying mode Action 2


• 2s2 Copying mode Action 2
• 1s2 Copying Using platen glass Action 2
• Shift/Shift w/Reduce copying (1s2, 2s2) Action 2
• Shift/Shift w/Reduce copying (1s1, 2s1) Action 1
• Sheet/Cover Insertion copying (1s2, 2s2) Action 2
• Sheet/Cover Insertion copying (1s1, 2s1) Action 1
• Image Insertion copying (using RADF) Action 2
• Image Insertion copying (using platen glass) Action 2
• Chapter Action 2
• Combination Action 2
• Image Insert Action 2
• Book Copy Action 2
• Booklet Action 2
• Platen Memory copying Action 2
• Proof Copy (1s2, 2s2) Action 2
• Proof Copy (1s1, 2s1) Action 1

Troubleshooting 13-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Memory Overflow (continued)

Action 1
Action 1 is required when a job prematurely stops after the machine produces one
copied set and Memory overflow messages display alternately. Action 1 enables you to
continue the job (see procedure below) or suspend the job (see procedure at the bottom
of the page). Check the discharged copied set to see if the acquired scanned data is
sufficient for you to continue the job in the print quantity remaining.

To continue the job:


1 Press [START] to allow the machine to prepare the scanned data for job completion
in the amount remaining in the print quantity setting. When preparation of the
scanned data satisfies the print quantity setting, the machine will stop, and scanned
data will be erased.

(If the Staple mode had been selected for the job, it will be changed to Sort mode,
automatically.)

The following messages display, alternately:

If continuous working
check output after copying

- Memory full - Start => START key


Cancel => ST/CL key
(Alternately displayed)

2 Check pages of the discharged set to confirm the amount of missing data, before
completing the job.
3 Press [START] to complete the job according to the print quantity remaining.

To suspend the job:


1 Press [STOP/CLEAR] to save the job settings.
Or, press [AUTO RESET] to clear the job and resume initial settings.
All scanned data will be erased.

13-6 Troubleshooting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Memory Overflow (continued)

Action 2
Action 2 is required when a job ceases with no copies produced and Memory overflow
messages display alternately. Action 2 enables you to continue the job (see procedure
below) or suspend the job (see procedure at the bottom of the page).

To continue the job:


1 Press [START] to allow the machine to prepare the scanned data for job completion
in the amount remaining in the print quantity setting. When preparation of the
scanned data satisfies the print quantity setting, the machine will stop, and scanned
data will be erased.

The following messages display, alternately:

If continuous working
check output after copying

- Memory full - Start => START key


Cancel => ST/CL key
(Alternately displayed)

2 Check pages of the discharged set to confirm the amount of missing data, before
completing the job.
3 Press [START] to complete the job according to the print quantity remaining.

To suspend the job:


1 Press [STOP/CLEAR] to save the job settings.
Or, press [AUTO RESET] to clear the job and resume initial settings.
All scanned data will be erased.

Troubleshooting 13-7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Power OFF/ON Screen

When any trouble affects the electric signal of the copier, the Power OFF/ON Screen will
be displayed.

Power OFF/ON Screen

13-8 Troubleshooting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Clearing Mishandled Paper

CAUTION
When removing mishandled paper, be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine,
avoid touching the drum or scratching it in any way, and keep all metal and magnetic
objects, e.g., watches, jewelry, etc. away from the drum area.

When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper
codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area(s). A flashing code indicates the
area that should be cleared first. To view Help screen instructions, touch GUIDE when
the flashing mishandled paper code displays. Be sure to remove paper from each
flashing location until all locations are cleared. See procedures on the following pages.

The following 13 mishandled paper codes display for specific areas of the machine.

Code Location
[2] : Tray 1 and/or Upper right side cover
[3] : Tray 2 and/or Upper right side cover
[4] : Tray 3 and/or Lower right side cover
[5] : Tray 4 and/or Lower right side cover
[6] : Multi-sheet bypass tray
[7] : Multi-sheet bypass and/or Main body
[8] : Main body
[9] : Main body
[10] : Main body and/or left side cover
[11] : ADU and/or Main body
[12] : Finisher
[13] : RADF

Troubleshooting 13-9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Clearing Mishandled Paper (continued)

WARNING:
The drum unit generates high voltage. To avoid bodily electrical shock NEVER TOUCH
the area.

CAUTION:
The internal fixing unit is very hot. To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH the area.
Use care when withdrawing the fixing unit.

CAUTION:
The paper exit unit of the main body (outlet of fixing unit) is very hot. To avoid getting
burned DO NOT TOUCH the area.

CAUTION:
Use care after opening the duplex tray. Keep fingers away from the closing area.

CAUTION:
DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two staple driving portions or into the grooves of
the paper exit lever, otherwise you may be injured.

CAUTION:
To avoid injury when the finisher middle exit tray moves up and down, DO NOT PUT
your hand into the two portions of the closing area.

13-10 Troubleshooting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tips
COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON
Fully insert paper trays.
Close RADF.
Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electrical socket.

COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT


Manually adjust copy density to darker density.
Check toner indicator and add toner, if required.
Check paper for dampness. Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high.
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required.
Check the Density shift.

COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK


Manually adjust copy density to lighter density.
Check to see if Photo, Text, or Increase Contrast mode is required.
Check the Density shift.

COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS


Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied.
Keep platen glass and inner surface of document cover clean.
Call for service if “Call for service” is displayed in the message area.
Check density indicator and lighten if required.

COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING


Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location. Do not exceed the tray
capacity.

COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF


Check copy paper thickness. Use Thick paper mode, if paper weight requires it.

MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED


Image Shift and Reduce & Shift are incompatible with magnification.
Press [AUTO RESET] and set desired copying conditions without using Image Shift or
Reduce & Shift.

Troubleshooting 13-11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tips (continued)
THE TOUCH SCREEN COPY SIZE INDICATOR DISPLAYS [!] ON THE TRAY
The [!] symbol indicates that the paper loaded in the tray is inconsistent with the tray
position setting.

DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED


Fully close ADU and RADF, then select Duplex mode again.

COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING START


Insert or adjust the appropriate paper tray for copy size selected.
Close document cover firmly.
Close front door completely.

COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED


Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper.

COPY QUALITY IS POOR


Check paper for dampness, and replace if necessary.

THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE DOCUMENT FEEDER


Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight.
Be sure originals are not stapled.
Align originals evenly in the RADF.
Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals.

COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED


Be sure copy paper is inserted straight.

USING ECM, COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED


Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed.
Contact key operator to reset limit.

FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE


Press Output mode key.
Remove paper misfeed, if any. Properly close finisher door.

RADF INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER AUTO/RESET IS PRESSED


Fully close RADF.

RADF LIGHT IS FLASHING


The document feeder is ready to accept originals.
Insert originals on RADF tray, press [AUTO RESET], then [START].

13-12 Troubleshooting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Tips (continued)
ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED
New toner supply is needed. Follow instructions for adding toner.

CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA


Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance.

APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE


Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals.

IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE, A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE DISPLAYS, EVEN
THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS
Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size; otherwise,
the [!] symbol will be displayed on the Copy Size indicator of the Paper Tray Selection
Screen.

THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN USER’S MANUAL
Check with the key operator, as Initial Settings may have been changed.

PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL


This message displays when the copier detects a non-standard paper size on the platen
glass.
Select copy size and press [START]. 1.00 magnification will be selected automatically.
If this message continues to display after selecting copy size, select 1.00 magnification,
even if it is already indicated, then press [START]. If desired, ask your Konica service
representative to enable the machine to default to 1.00 magnification in this situation.

SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED


Blank insertion: Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the
locations designated for sheet insertion.
Copy insertion: To ensure that chapter sheets in 1-2 mode always appear on the right
hand side in the finished set, insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting
screen with odd numbers, not even. If required, make an even numbered original page
odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page, so that the blank sheet is even and
the insertion sheet is odd.

FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED


The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically (portrait
style).

Troubleshooting 13-13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Section 14 : Machine Specifications

Specifications

Machine Specifications 14-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Specifications
Product Name Konica 7045

Configuration Console with stationary platen

Photoreceptor OPC drum

Method Laser Electrostatic

Toner Black, cartridge type

Recommended Operating Environment 50°~86°F (10°~30°C); 10~80% RH

Warm Up Approx. 90 sec. @68°(20°C); 50% RH

Auto Reset Off/30 sec./1 min./1.5 min./2 min./2.5 min./


3 min./3.5 min./4 min./4.5 min./5 min.

First Copy Out Time From Platen Glass:


3.9 sec. for 8.5"x11"

Copy Rate 45 cpm: 8.5"x11"


32 cpm: 8.5"x11"R
27 cpm: 8.5"x14"
23 cpm: 11"x17"
41 cpm: 5.5"x8.5"

Continuous Copy 1~999 copies

Copier Power Source 120V±10%/15A; 60Hz±2.5Hz

Power Consumption Max. 1,500VA (full option)


Copying: 1,300 VA (full option)

Noise Level (full system) Approx. 59 dB (A) or less, during copying

Automatic Modes AMS; AES (plus 9-level manual density);


APS detects 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11"R,
8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"

Magnification Presets; 0.50, 0.65, 0.77, 1.00, 1.29, 1.55, 2.00


3 User Sets - 0.25~4.00, set by key operator
Zoom range - 0.25~4.00 in 1% steps

Originals on Platen Max. size: 11"x17" (280mmx432mm)

Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice


14-2 Machine Specifications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Specifications
Originals in Document Feeder ADF mode: 1>1; 1>2
11"x17"; 8.5"x14"; 8.5"x11"R; 8.5"x11";
5.5"x8.5"R, 5.5"x8.5"
Max. 50 sheets (20 lb) feed/exit capacity
RADF mode: 2>2; 2>1
11"x17"; 8.5"x14"; 8.5"x11"R; 8.5"x11";
5.5"x8.5"R, 5.5"x8.5"
Max. 50 sheets (20 lb) feed/exit capacity
Mixed mode:
11"x17"+8.5"x14"+8.5"x11"+5.5"x8.5" or
8.5"x14"+8.5"x11"R, 8.5"x11", 5.5"x8.5"
Max. 50 sheets (20 lb) feed/exit capacity
Original weight:
20~24 lb bond; curl max. 10 mm or less
(Transparency, Paste-up, Offset master,
Labels, & Intermediate papers unavailable)

Paper Source Main body trays 1/2/3/4; 500/500/1,000/


1,500 sheets
Multi-sheet bypass tray; 100 sheets
Trays 1/2/3/4 user adjustable
Paper Exit Tray 100 sheets (20 lb)
Paper Weight 20 lb~24 lb bond recommended
(Max. range: 16 lb~19 lb, 25 lb~32 lb)
Transparency film, Labels, 3-hole
Main Body Safety Standard UL 1950; CSA 22.2 No. 950 -93
Radio Interference FCC Rules part 15, sub-part B Class A
Memory 32 MB (max. 288 MB)
Options Finisher (FS-109)
Drawer base unit (DB-208)
Drawer base unit (DB-208A)
Drawer base unit (DB-608)
Expanded Memory Unit (MU-403: 32 MB,
MU-404: 64 MB, MU-405: 128 MB)
Remote Diagnostics
External Image Processor (IP-431)
Network Interface Board(KN-303)
Hard Disk Drive (HD-103)
PostScript 3 (PS-342)
Key Counter
Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice
Machine Specifications 14-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Specifications
Machine Weight 198 lb (90 kg)
+31 lb (14 kg) RADF (DF-315)
+81.5 lb (37 kg) Stapler-Finisher (FS-109)

Machine Dimensions Main Body (with RADF)


Width: 25.5 in. (647 mm)
Depth: 27.8 in. (706 mm)
Height: 29.3 in. (745 mm)
45.1 in. (1145 mm) (w/Drawer
Base Unit)
Document Feeder (RADF)
Width: 23.2 in. (590 mm)
Depth: 22.4 in. (570 mm)
Height: 5.90 in. (150 mm)
Max. open angle: 70° (± 5°)
Stapler-Finisher
Width: 21.5 in. (545 mm)
Depth: 23.6 in. (599 mm)
Height: 24.5 in. (623 mm)

Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Paper size: 11"x17", 8.5"x14", 8.5"x11",


5.5"x8.5"
Paper weight: 20~24 lb
Paper curl limit: 20 mm or less
Non-stack type
Modes: 1>2; 2>2

Stapling Finisher Power source: Main body


Non-sort mode:
Finisher upper tray:
100 sheets
10 sheets
(thin/thick paper, transparency film.etc.)
Finisher middle/lower tray:
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)

Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice


14-4 Machine Specifications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Specifications
Sort/Group/Staple-sort mode:
Finisher upper tray cannot be used
Staple Capacity:
50 sheets (20 lb paper) or 5 mm or less
Finisher middle/lower tray:
700 sheets (8.5"x11", 8.5"x11"R, A4R, A4)
300 sheets (11"x17", 8.5"x14", 5.5"x8.5"R)

Staple Cartridge 5000 staples/cartridge

Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice


Machine Specifications 14-5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index

Index 1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index
SYMBOL Automatic Exposure Selection (AES) 3-9, 6-7
“+” indication 11-43 Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) 3-9, 6-9
[!] indicator 6-16 Automatic Paper Selection (APS) 3-9, 6-8
▲ mark 12-7 Automatic Rotation 6-28
▼ mark 12-7 Automatic Tray Selection (ATS) 3-10
Auto/reset effect 11-48
NUMBER Auto/Reset Mode 3-9
1.00 key 11-11
1 SHOT indication time 11-50 B
1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 copying 6-4 BACK BLANK key 8-7
1-2 Upside Down 8-28 BACK COPY key 8-7
2-1 Upside Down 8-28 Back Cover Mode 8-4
2 in 1 8-10 Basic Screen 3-8, 6-2
2 Repeat 8-33 BLANK INSERTION key 8-7
4 in 1 8-10 Blank sheet interleaving 8-14
4 Repeat 8-33 Book Copy 8-20
5.5x8.5 orig. type 11-50 Booklet 8-12
8 in 1 8-10 Bypass (Bypa) key 6-16
8 Repeat 8-33
C
A Call for Service 13-2
Abnormal Conditions 2-8 Canadian Department of Communications
Action 1 13-6 Regurations 2-2
Action 2 13-7 Cartridge holders 3-5
Adapters and Plural Loads 2-7 CAUTION 2-3
ADD PAPER indicator 12-2 Change ECM Data 11-21
ADD PAPER key 6-20 Chapter 8-8
Add toner icon 6-2 CHECK key 3-7
ADD TONER message 3-11, 12-7 Check Mode 6-29
ADF mode 4-3 Cleaning Materials 2-10
ADU 3-3 CLEAR QTY. key 3-7
AES key 11-10 Clearing Mishandled Paper 13-9
All Counter Reset 11-26 Combination 8-10
AMS key 11-11 Configuration Options 1-12
AMS key (-A-) 6-15 Control panel 3-3
Application Customize 11-52 Control panel contrast key 3-12
Application Function Menu 8-2 Control Panel Layout 3-7
Application icon 6-2 Copier Initial 11-8
APPLICATION key 3-7, 8-2 COPY INSERTION key 8-7
APS key 6-15 COPY key 3-7
APS key (Copier Initial) 11-12 Copy Limit 11-21
ATS/APS SW 11-49 Copy Limit Reached Effect 11-28
Auto Detection mode 8-33 Copy Mode 6-4
AUTO Layout 8-39 Copy Mode (Copier Initial) 11-9
Auto Low Power 5-2, 11-44 Copy sheet interleaving 8-14
AUTO RESET key 3-7 Copy Size 6-15
Auto reset timer 11-48 Counter List 5-7
Auto Shut-Off 5-3, 11-44
Auto tray switch 11-48
Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) 3-3

2 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index
D Front Cover + Full Scan mode 8-20
DANGER 2-3 Front Cover Mode 8-4
DATA indicator 3-7 Front door 3-3
DATE/TIME 8-44 Front/Back + Full Scan mode 8-20
Density (Copier Initial) 11-10 Full Scan mode 8-20
Density (Preset) 11-16 Function Menu Map 11-4
Density Shift 11-54
Disposal of the Copier 2-10
G
Document cover 12-10 GROUP key 7-9, 7-16
Document glass 12-10 Group Mode 7-8, 7-16
Drum unit 3-4 Group with normal exit 7-14
Duplex copy 6-4 GUIDE key 13-9

E H
ECM (Electronic Copy Monitor) 11-19 HELP key 3-7
ECM Data List 11-24 HELP MENU key 6-33
ECM ID No. 11-21 Help Mode 6-33
ECM Master Key Code 3-11, 11-19 I
ECM On/Off Setting 11-27
Icon area 6-2
ECM password 5-4, 11-21
Image Insert 8-17
Electronic Copy Monitor (ECM) 11-19
Image Shift 8-40
Empty icon 6-16
Increase Contrast Mode 8-30
ENERGY STAR Program (front page)
Initial Settings 3-9
EXCEEDS LIMIT message 13-12
Insertion Mode 8-4
Extension Cords (Leads) 2-7
Internal Machine 3-4
External Machine 3-2
INTERRUPT indicator 6-31
F INTERRUPT key 3-7, 6-31
Face Up Exit 7-15, 7-19 Interrupt Mode 6-31
Face UP key 7-19 J
Face Up Mode 7-13
JAM key 6-19
Face Up TRAY 1 key 7-13
Job Check key 9-4
FCC Regulations 2-2
JOB LIST key 6-21
FDA Regulations 2-2
Job List Screen 6-21
Finisher 3-3
Job Memory Form 9-5
Finisher lower tray 3-5
JOB MEMORY key 3-7
Finisher middle tray 3-5
Job memory list 11-51
Finisher mode icon 6-2
Job memory recall 11-49
Finisher Operation 2-9
Job number icon 3-11, 6-2
Finisher Specifications 7-2
Job Recall 9-4
Finisher upper tray 3-5
Job Store 9-2
Fire Prevention 2-6
Fixing unit 3-4 K
Fold Erasure 8-37 Key click sound 11-49
Folded Original 8-25 Key counter 3-3
Folder keys 6-2 Key-Ope mode key 6-33, 11-3
Font pattern 11-51 Key Operator Data 11-32
For Assistance 11-32 Key Operator ECM Form 11-56
Frame Erasure 8-37 Key Operator Mode 11-2
Frame/Fold Erasure 8-37 Key Operator Password 3-11, 11-2
FRONT BLANK key 8-7 Keypad 3-7
FRONT COPY key 8-7 KRDS Host 11-55

Index 3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index
L O
Label Locations 2-4 Oblique erase mode 8-42
Landscape type original 8-10 Optional Equipment 1-12
Language 11-7 Original density 11-15
Laser Safety 2-2 Out-of-paper icon 6-15
LCD screen 3-7 Output (Copier Initial) 11-13
LCD touch screen 3-3 OUTPUT key 3-7
Lead Edge Delete 3-10 Output quantity/Enter quantity display 6-2
Left binding key 8-13 OVERLAY 8-44
Left side cover 3-3
Left partition glass 12-10 P
Left/Right bind key 8-29 [P] key 3-7, 5-7
Lens Mode 6-8 PAGE 8-44
Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble 13-3 Panel Contrast 11-31
List Print 11-51 Paper 2-9
Load RADF effect 11-48 Paper Exit Switching of Finisher Tray 3-12, 4-7, 7-3
Lock icon 9-3, 11-29 Paper Type 11-30
Lock Job Memory 11-29 Paper Weight Compatibility Chart 4-8
Lower right side cover 3-3 Password Setting 11-42
Lunch Hour Off Function 11-40 PCUA number 12-11
Periodic Check 2-9
M Photo Mode 8-30
Machine Care 2-8 Platen AMS 11-49
Machine Configuration 3-2 Platen APS 11-48
Machine Contact 2-8 Platen glass 4-2
Machine Labels 2-4 Platen Store Mode 6-23
Machine Modification 2-9 Plug and Cord (Lead) 2-7
Machine Relocation 2-6 Plug Socket 2-7
Machine Working Day Individual Set 11-38 PM CALL message 3-11
Magnification (Copier Initial) 11-11 Portrait type original 8-10
Magnification (Preset) 11-18 Power OFF/ON Screen 13-8
Main power switch 3-3 Power Save 11-44
Manual Mode (Lighter, Normal, Darker) 6-7 Power Saver 2-10
Manual Shut-Off 5-3 Power Saver Mode 5-2
Memory indicator 6-2 POWER SAVER ON/OFF key 3-7
Memory Overflow 13-4 Power switch 3-3
Memory Switch 11-46 Preset and User Set Ratios 6-10
Mixed Original 8-23 Preset Key 11-16
Mixed size original mode 4-3 Preventive Maintenance (PM) 12-9
Multi-sheet bypass tray 3-3, 12-6 Preventive maintenance icon 6-2
PRINT key 3-7
N Proof Copy 6-29
Non-Image Area Erase (Application) 8-42 PROOF COPY key (control panel) 3-7
Non-Image Area Erase (Memory switch) 11-48 PROOF COPY key (touch screen) 6-29
Non-Image Erase 11-15
Non-Sort Mode 7-4
Non-Standard Size 8-27
Normal Exit 7-14, 7-16
NUMBERING 8-44

4 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index
R Staple mode reset 11-49
RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) 3-3 Staple position icon 6-2
RADF AMS 11-49 STAPLE SET key 7-12
RADF APS 11-49 Staple Sheet Capacity 3-11
RADF frame erasure 11-48 Staple-Sort Mode 7-10
RADF Hinges 2-9 START key 3-7
RADF mode 4-3 STOP/CLEAR key 3-7
RADF Store Mode 6-25 Storage 3-3
RE key 6-10 Store Mode 6-23
Rectangular erase mode 8-42 Store Mode key 6-23
Reduce & Shift 8-41 SUMMER TIME key 11-6
Release lever 3-5 Supplies 12-11
Remote Diagnostics 11-55 System Initial 11-6
Repairs 12-11
Repeat 8-33
T
Report code No. 13-2 Temperature and Humidity 2-6
Reserve 6-17 Text Mode 8-30
RESERVE key 6-17 Text/Photo Enhance 8-30
Reverse Image 8-32 THICK PAPER key 8-16
Right binding key 8-13 THIN PAPER key 8-16
Rotation 6-26 Thin/Thick Paper 8-16
Rotation (Memory switch) 11-50 Time (System Initial) 11-6
Rotation Exit 7-15, 7-17 TIMER indicator 3-7
Rotation+Group exit 7-15, 7-17 Timer Interrupt 5-5
Rotation icon 6-2 Timer interrupt password 5-5, 11-42
Rotation+Sort exit 7-15, 7-17 Toner 2-9
Toner cartridge 3-4, 12-7
S Toner unit 3-4, 12-7
SCAN key (control panel) 3-7 Top/Botom bind key 8-29
SCAN key (touch screen) 6-2, 6-24 Total counter 3-4
Service 12-11 Touch Panel Adjustment 11-43
Service call icon 6-33 Touch Screen 3-8
Service Messages 2-9 Transparency Interleaving 8-14
Service Settings 3-11 Tray (Copier Initial) 11-12
SETTING indicator 6-19 Troubleshooting Tips 13-11
Sheet Insertion 11-50
Sheet/Cover Insertion 8-3
U
Short Circuit from Water Damage 2-6 Universal tray 12-3
Simplex copy 6-4 Unsuitable RADF Originals 4-3
Site Requirements 3-6 Upper right side cover 3-3
SORT key 7-7 Upside Down 8-28
Sort Mode 7-6, 7-16 User Name 11-21
Sort with normal exit 7-14 User setting list 11-51
Space Allotment 2-6 USERSET 1, 2, 3 (Magnification) 11-18
Special Original 8-23 Userset 1, 2 (Density) 11-16
Special Paper 8-14 V
Special Ratio Table 6-12
Ventilation 2-6
STAMP 8-44
Vertical/Horizontal Width Setting mode 8-33
Standard Equipment 1-12 Vertical/Horizontal Zoom 6-13
Staple cartridge 12-8 Vibrations 2-6
Staple drive portions 3-5
STAPLE key 7-12

Index 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Index
W
“Warming up” message 6-2
WARNING 2-3
WATERMARK 8-44
Web Site Address (copyright page)
Weekly Timer 11-33
Weekly Timer Copier ON/OFF Time Set 11-36
Weekly Timer Function 5-5
Weekly Timer Master Key Code 3-11, 11-33
Weekly Timer Setting 11-35
Work table 3-3

Z
ZOOM key 6-11
Zoom Mode 6-11

6 Index

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Konica Business Technologies, Inc.
500 Day Hill Road Windsor, CT 06095
Telephone; (860) 683-2222
OP-7045-01

Printed in Japan September 2000

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like